Canon Pc1200s - Ir1200s SM

SmartBase PC1200s/
iR1200s
REVISION 0
DEC. 2001 HY8-10AU-000

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001
Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical
theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all
localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to
improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in
the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises.
In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period,
Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered
trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this
manual may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or
in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

INTRODUCTION
1 Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution,
or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric
outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the

topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in ques-

REF.
tion.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.
Refers to the Copier Basics Series for a better understanding of the contents.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001 i

INTRODUCTION
2 Outline of the Manual

This Service Manual provides basic facts and figures needed to service the SmartBase
PC1200 Series/iR1200 Series products in the field, and it consists of the following chapters:
Chapter 1 Product Outline: specifications, names of parts, safety and warnings

Chapter 2 Using the Machine: control panel, user mode, service mode
Chapter 3 Installation: site requirements, installation procedure, work for reloca-
tion
Chapter 4 Operation: mechanical system by function, principles of operation of
electrical systems
Chapter 5 Mechanical System: mechanical construction, disassembly/assembly
Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection: periodically replaced parts, durables (life), basic servicing
chart, cleaning
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting: standards/adjustments, troubleshooting image faults,
troubleshooting malfunctions
Appendix: general timing chart, general circuit diagrams
ii COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001

INTRODUCTION
The descriptions in this Service Manual are based on he following rules:

1. In each chapter, the uses of the function in question and its relationship to electrical and
mechanical systems are discussed and the timing of operation of its associated parts is
explained by means of outlines and diagrams.
In the diagrams, the symbol represents a mechanical path, while the symbol
with a name next to it indicates the flow of an electric signal.
The expression “turn on the power” means turning on the power switch, closing the
front cover, and closing the delivery cover so that the machine will be supplied with
power.
2. In circuit diagrams (digital), a signal whose level is High is expressed as being ‘1’,
while a single whose level is Low is expressed as being ‘0’; the level of voltage, how-
ever, varies from circuit to circuit.
The machine uses CPUs, whose internal mechanisms cannot be checked in the field,
and, therefore, are not explained. In addition, the machine’s PCBs are not intended for
repairs at the user’s and, therefore, are explained by means of block diagrams: two types
are used, i.e., between sensors and inputs of PCBs equipped with a control or drive
function and between outputs equipped with a control or drive function and loads; in ad-
dition, functional block diagrams are used at times.
Changes made to the machine for product improvement are communicated in the form of
a Service Information bulletin as needed. All service persons are expected to go through all
service documentation including the bulletins and be equipped to respond to the needs of
the field (as by being able to identify possible causes of problems).
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001 iii

INTRODUCTION
This service manual covers the models shown in the following table. Be sure to have a
good understanding of the difference from model to model before referring to this
manual.
Model Type ADF Printer Fax Counter Default Cassette Copying speed
code function function function function ratio (cpm) at Direct
iR1210G UJA √ √ 2R2E 250 sheets 12cpm/A4
iR1230G UKA √ √ √ 2R2E 250 sheets 12cpm/A4
PC1210D UGA/ √ 2R2E 250 sheets 12cpm/A4
UUK
PC1230D UHA/ √ √ 2R2E 250 sheets 12cpm/A4
UUM
PC1270D UIA √ √ √ 2R2E 250 sheets 12cpm/A4
The notation “√” indicates that the item in question is available.
iv COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001

CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
1 Specifications ...................................... 1-1 2.2 Cross Section ........................... 1-16
1.1 Type ............................................ 1-1 2.2.1 Body .................................. 1-16
1.2 Mechanisms ............................... 1-1 2.2.2 ADF (if equipped with ADF
1.3 Functions .................................... 1-2 functions) ........................... 1-17
1.4 Others ......................................... 1-3 3 Safety and Warnings ......................... 1-18
1.5 Copying Speed ........................... 1-4 3.1 Safety of Laser Light ......... 1-18
1.6 ADF (if equipped with ADF 3.1.1 Safety of the Laser Unit ..... 1-18
functions) ................................... 1-5 3.1.2 CDRH Requirements ......... 1-18
1.7 FAX (if equipped fax functions) 1-6 3.1.3 Handling the Laser Unit .... 1-19
1.7.1 Communications 3.2 Safety of the Toner ................... 1-20
specifications ....................... 1-6 3.3 Storing and Handling the
1.7.2 Scanner section Cartridge .................................. 1-20
specifications ....................... 1-7 3.3.1 Storing a Cartridge Before
1.7.3 Printer section Unpacking .......................... 1-20
specifications ....................... 1-7 3.3.2 Storing or Handling the
1.7.4 Functions ............................. 1-8 Cartridge After Unpacking 1-21
2 Names of Parts .................................. 1-12 3.3.2.1 Storing After Unpacking1-21
2.1 External View ........................... 1-12 3.3.2.2 Points to Note When
2.1.1 Body (ADF type) ............... 1-12 Handling the Cartridge . 1-22
2.1.2 Body (copyboard type) ...... 1-13
2.1.3 ADF (if equipped with ADF
functions) ........................... 1-15
CHAPTER 2 USING THE MACHINE

1 Using the Machine .............................. 2-1 3 Service Mode .................................... 2-20
1.1 Control Panel ............................. 2-1 3.1 Outline ..................................... 2-20
2 User Mode .......................................... 2-5 3.2 Using Service Mode ................ 2-22
2.1 User Mode Menu ....................... 2-5 3.3 List of Service Mode Menus ... 2-23
2.2 User Report .............................. 2-17 3.4 Bit Switch Settings
2.2.1 Manually Generating a (#1 SSSW) ............................... 2-31
Report ................................ 2-17 3.5 Menu Switch Settings
2.2.2 Automatically Generating (#2 MENU) .............................. 2-44
Reports (if equipped with fax 3.6 Numeric Parameter Setting
functions) ........................... 2-18 (#3 NUMERIC Param.) ........... 2-46
2.2.2.1 Memory Clear List ....... 2-19 3.7 SPECIAL Setting
(#4A SPECIAL) ....................... 2-49
3.8 NCU Setting (#4B NCU) ......... 2-49
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001 v

CONTENTS
3.9 ISDN Setting (#4C ISDN) ....... 2-49 3.21.6 MODEM NCU Test
3.10 Country/Region of Installation (4: MODEM NCU) ........... 2-77
(#5 TYPE) ................................ 2-49 3.21.6.1 Relay Test ..................... 2-77
3.11 Setting the Original Reading 3.21.6.2 Frequency Test .............. 2-78
Functions (#6 SCANNER) ...... 2-50 3.21.6.3 G3 Signal Transmission
3.12 Setting the Printer Parameters Test ................................ 2-78
(#7 PRINTER) ......................... 2-51 3.21.6.4 DTMF Signal Transmission
3.12.1 #1 SSSW Setting ............... 2-51 Test ................................ 2-79
3.12.2 #2 NUMERIC Param. 3.21.6.5 Tonal/DTMF Signal
Setting ................................ 2-52 Reception Test .............. 2-79
3.12.3 #3 PRINT COUNT ............ 2-52 3.21.7 AGING Test
3.12.4 #4 PRINT RESET ............. 2-52 (5: AGING TEST) ............. 2-80
3.12.5 #5 MLT CLEANING ......... 2-52 3.21.8 FACULTY (function) Test
3.13 PDL (#8 PDL) .......................... 2-52 (6: FACULTY TEST) ........ 2-80
3.14 Counter (#9 COUNTER) ......... 2-53 3.21.9 BOOK Read Test
3.14.1 Counter .............................. 2-53 (8: BOOK TEST) .............. 2-86
3.14.2 Clearing the Counter 3.22 Service Report .......................... 2-87
Readings ............................ 2-54 3.22.1 Manually Generating
3.15 Generating a Report Reports ............................... 2-87
(#10 REPORT) ......................... 2-54 3.22.1.1 SYSTEM (SERVICE)
3.16 Downloading DATA LIST ................... 2-87
(#11 DOWNLOAD) ................ 2-54 3.22.1.2 SYSTEM DUMP
3.17 Clearing (#12 CLEAR) ............ 2-55 LIST .............................. 2-88
3.18 ROM Indication (#13 ROM) ... 2-55 3.22.1.3 KEY HISTORY
3.19 Resetting the Contact Sensor Posi- REPORT ....................... 2-90
tion (#14 CS SET) ................... 2-55 3.22.1.4 COUNTER REPORT ... 2-91
3.20 Service Mode Default Setting .. 2-56 3.22.1.5 PRINT SPEC
3.21 Test Mode (TEST MODE) ...... 2-66 REPORT ....................... 2-92
3.21.1 Outline ............................... 2-66 3.22.2 Automatically Generated
3.21.2 List of Test Mode Items ..... 2-67 Reports ............................... 2-92
3.21.3 D-RAM Test (1: DRAM) .. 2-74 3.22.2.1 Error TX Report
3.21.4 CCD Test (2: CCD TEST) . 2-75 (for service) .................. 2-93
3.21.5 PRINT Test (3: PRINT) ..... 2-76 3.22.2.2 RX Report (for service) 2-94
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
1 Selecting the Site ................................ 3-1 2.5 Putting Paper in the Cassette ..... 3-7
2 Unpacking and Installing the 2.6 Putting Paper in the Manual
Machine .............................................. 3-2 Feed Tray ................................... 3-8
2.1 Before Starting ........................... 3-2 2.7 Connecting the Interface Cable .. 3-9
2.2 Installation Procedure ................ 3-2 2.8 Connecting the Modular Cable
2.3 Unpacking .................................. 3-3 (if equipped with fax functions) 3-9
2.4 Fitting the Cartridge ................... 3-5 2.9 Connecting the Power Cord ..... 3-10
vi COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001

CONTENTS
2.10 Fitting the Delivery Tray .......... 3-10 2.13.1 Setting the Date/Time (user
2.11 Checking the Copy Images ...... 3-10 mode) ................................. 3-12
2.12 Setting the Printer Functions ... 3-11 2.13.2 Setting the Dial Type ......... 3-13
2.13 Setting Fax Functions (if equipped 2.13.3 Executing Communications
with fax functions) ................... 3-12 Testing ............................... 3-13
3 When Relocating the Machine ......... 3-14
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
1 Basic Operation .................................. 4-1 5.2 Pickup Operation ..................... 4-18
1.1 Reproduction Processes ............. 4-1 5.2.1 Pickup from the Cassette ... 4-18
1.1.1 Outline ................................. 4-1 5.2.1.1 Outline .......................... 4-18
1.2 Functional Construction ............ 4-4 5.2.1.2 Retry Pickup ................. 4-19
1.3 Outline of the Electrical 5.2.1.3 Detecting the Size of
Circuitry ..................................... 4-5 Paper ............................. 4-19
1.3.1 Functional Block Diagram .. 4-5 5.2.2 Pickup from the Manual
1.3.2 Outlines of Functions .......... 4-6 Feed Tray ........................... 4-20
1.3.2.1 Image Processor PCB ..... 4-6 5.2.2.1 Outline .......................... 4-20
1.3.2.2 DC Controller PCB ........ 4-7 5.2.2.2 Retry Pickup ................. 4-21
1.3.2.3 Control Panel PCB ......... 4-8 5.2.2.3 Detecting the Size of
1.3.2.4 Power Supply PCB ......... 4-8 Paper ............................. 4-21
1.3.2.5 Analog Processor PCB ... 4-9 5.3 Feeding Operation/Delivery
1.3.2.6 Sensor PCB ..................... 4-9 Operation ................................. 4-22
1.3.2.7 Laser Driver/BD PCB ..... 4-9 5.3.1 Outline ............................... 4-22
1.3.2.8 Main Motor/Scanner Motor 5.3.2 Auto Delivery Control ....... 4-22
Driver .............................. 4-9 5.4 Reducing the Copying Speed .. 4-23
1.3.2.9 Printer Controller PCB ... 4-9 5.4.1 Outline ............................... 4-23
1.3.2.10 NCU PCB (if equipped with 5.5 Detecting Jams ......................... 4-24
fax functions) ................ 4-10 5.5.1 Outline ............................... 4-24
1.3.2.11 Modular Jack PCB 5.5.2 Types of Jams .................... 4-24
(if equipped with fax 6 Fixing System ................................... 4-26
functions) ...................... 4-10 6.1 Outline ..................................... 4-26
1.4 Power-On Sequence ................. 4-11 6.2 Controlling the Fixing
1.5 Controlling the Main Motor .... 4-12 Operation ................................. 4-27
1.5.1 Outline ............................... 4-12 6.2.1 Controlling the Fixing
2 Image Reading/Processing System ... 4-13 Temperature ....................... 4-27
2.1 Outline ..................................... 4-13 6.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film
3 Laser Exposure System .................... 4-14 Bias .................................... 4-29
3.1 Outline ..................................... 4-14 6.2.3 Fixing Heater Safety
4 Image Formation System .................. 4-16 Mechanism ......................... 4-29
4.1 Outline ..................................... 4-16 6.2.4 Detecting a Fault in the
5 Pickup/Feeding/Delivery System ..... 4-17 Fixing Assembly ................ 4-29
5.1 Outline ..................................... 4-17
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001 vii

CONTENTS
7 Power Supply System ....................... 4-31 8.2.1.3 Vanadium Lithium

7.1 Low Voltage Circuit ................. 4-31 Secondary Battery
7.1.1 Low Voltage Power Supply (BAT2) .......................... 4-37
Circuit ................................ 4-31 8.2.2 Back-Up Data .................... 4-38
7.1.2 Protective Functions .......... 4-33 8.2.2.1 Types of Data ................ 4-38
7.2 High-Voltage Power Supply 8.2.2.2 Printing the Backup Data
Circuit ...................................... 4-33 List ................................ 4-40
7.3 Controlling the ESS 9 ADF (if equipped with ADF
Mechanism ............................... 4-33 functions) .......................................... 4-41
7.3.1 Outline ............................... 4-33 9.1 Outline ..................................... 4-41
7.3.2 Operation ........................... 4-33 9.2 Picking Up and Moving
8 Others ................................................ 4-34 Originals ................................... 4-42
8.1 Fan ........................................... 4-34 9.2.1 Outline ............................... 4-42
8.1.1 Outline ............................... 4-34 9.2.2 Moving Down the Original
8.2 Back-Up Batteries .................... 4-35 Pickup Roller and Moving Up
8.2.1 Back-Up Function ............. 4-35 the Original Stopper .......... 4-43
8.2.1.1 Outline .......................... 4-35 9.3 Detecting an Original Jam ....... 4-44
8.2.1.2 Lithium Battery 9.3.1 Outline ............................... 4-44
(BAT1) .......................... 4-35 9.3.2 Types of Jams .................... 4-44
CHAPTER 5 MECHANICAL SYSTEM

1 Points to Note When Disassembling/As- 2.1.2 Removing the Control
sembling the Machine ......................... 5-1 Panel .................................... 5-8
2 Disassembly ........................................ 5-3 2.1.3 Removing the Copyboard
2.1 Externals/Auxiliary System ....... 5-3 Glass .................................. 5-10
2.1.1 External Covers ................... 5-3 2.1.4 Removing the Main Motor
2.1.1.1 Removing the Left Cover/Rear Unit .................................... 5-10
Cover ................................... 5-4 2.1.5 Remove the Fan ................. 5-14
2.1.1.2 Removing the Right 2.1.6 Removing the Reader Unit
Cover .............................. 5-4 Slide Detecting Switch ...... 5-16
2.1.1.3 Removing the Front 2.2 PCBs ........................................ 5-17
Cover .............................. 5-5 2.2.1 Removing the Image
2.1.1.4 Removing the Delivery Processor PCB ................... 5-17
Cover .............................. 5-5 2.2.2 Removing the Analog
2.1.1.5 Removing the Delivery Processor PCB ................... 5-17
Upper Cover/Delivery Rear 2.2.3 Removing the Sensor
Cover .............................. 5-6 PCB .................................... 5-20
2.1.1.6 Removing the Cartridge 2.2.4 Removing the DC Controller
Cover .............................. 5-6 PCB/Power Supply PCB ... 5-21
2.1.1.7 Removing the Upper Cover 2.2.5 Removing the Printer
........................................ 5-7 Controller PCB .................. 5-25
2.1.1.8 Removing the Right
Door ................................ 5-8
viii COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001

CONTENTS
2.2.6 Removing the NCU PCB 2.7.3 Removing the Delivery

(if equipped with fax Sensor ................................ 5-47
functions) ........................... 5-25 2.8 ADF System (if equipped with
2.2.7 Removing the Modular Jack ADF functions) ........................ 5-48
PCB .................................... 5-26 2.8.1 Externals/Auxiliary Control
2.3 Original Reading/Processing System ............................... 5-48
System ...................................... 5-27 2.8.1.1 Removing the ADF ....... 5-48
2.3.1 Removing the Contact 2.8.1.2 Removing the ADF Drive
Sensor ................................ 5-27 Unit ............................... 5-50
2.3.2 Removing the Reader Motor 2.8.1.3 Removing the ADF Motor
Drive Unit .......................... 5-28 Unit ............................... 5-51
2.3.3 Removing the Reader 2.8.1.4 Removing the Slide Guide
Unit .................................... 5-30 (front, rear) ................... 5-52
2.4 Laser Exposure System ............ 5-32 2.8.1.5 Mounting the Slide Guide
2.4.1 Removing the Laser Scanner (front, rear) ................... 5-53
Unit .................................... 5-32 2.8.2 Pickup System ................... 5-54
2.5 Image Formation System ......... 5-34 2.8.2.1 Removing the Separation
2.5.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller Unit .................... 5-54
Roller ....................................... 5-34 2.8.2.2 Removing the Original
2.6 Pickup/Feeding System ........... 5-35 Pickup roller/Original Sepa-
2.6.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup ration roller ................... 5-56
Roller ................................. 5-35 2.8.2.3 Removing the Original
2.6.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Sensor/Registration
Solenoid ............................. 5-37 Sensor ........................... 5-56
2.6.3 Removing the Manual Feed 2.8.2.4 Removing the Separation
Tray (upper) ....................... 5-39 Pad ................................ 5-57
2.6.4 Removing the Manual Feed 2.8.2.5 Removing the ADF Registra-
Tray (lower) ....................... 5-39 tion Roller ..................... 5-58
2.6.5 Removing the Manual Feed 2.8.3 Feeding System ................. 5-60
Pickup Roller ..................... 5-40 2.8.3.1 Removing the White
2.6.6 Removing the Separation Roller ............................ 5-60
Pad ..................................... 5-41 2.8.3.2 Removing the Feeding Out-
2.6.7 Removing the Manual Feed side Guide ..................... 5-61
Pickup Solenoid/Manual Feed 2.8.3.3 Removing the Feed
Tray Paper Sensor .............. 5-41 Roll ............................... 5-62
2.6.8 Removing the Vertical Path 2.8.3.4 Removing the Original Feed
Roller ................................. 5-42 Roller ............................ 5-63
2.6.9 Removing the Registration 2.8.4 Delivery System ........... 5-64
Roller Unit ......................... 5-42 2.8.4.1 Removing the Delivery
2.7 Fixing System .......................... 5-44 Stacking Tray/Original
2.7.1 Removing the Fixing Delivery Roller ............. 5-64
Assembly ........................... 5-44 2.8.4.2 Removing the Original
2.7.2 Removing the Fixing Film Unit/ Delivery Sensor ............ 5-65
Fixing Pressure Roller ....... 5-46
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001 ix

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

1 Periodically Replaced Parts ................ 6-1 4.3.6 Transfer Guide ..................... 6-5
2 Durables .............................................. 6-1 4.3.7 Transfer Charging Roller ..... 6-5
3 Scheduled Servicing Chart ................. 6-1 4.3.8 Separation Static
4 Cleaning .............................................. 6-2 Eliminator ............................ 6-5
4.1 Cleaning by the User 4.3.9 Paper Path ............................ 6-5
(machine) ................................... 6-2 4.3.10 Fixing Inlet Guide ............... 6-5
4.1.1 Cleaning the Fixing Pressure 4.3.11 Fixing Pressure Roller ......... 6-5
Roller ................................... 6-2 4.3.12 Delivery Roller .................... 6-6
4.1.2 Other Cleaning ..................... 6-2 4.3.13 Back of Copyboard Glass
4.2 Cleaning by the User (ADF) ...... 6-3 (Back of Shading Plate) ....... 6-6
4.2.1 Cleaning the White Roller ... 6-3 4.4 Cleaning at Time of a Service
4.2.2 Other Cleaning ..................... 6-3 Visit (ADF) ................................ 6-7
4.3 Cleaning at Time of a Service Visit 4.4.1 Original Pickup Roller ......... 6-7
(machine) ................................... 6-4 4.4.2 Original Separation Roller ... 6-7
4.3.1 Selfoc Lens Array of the 4.4.3 Original Separation Pad ....... 6-7
Contact Sensor ..................... 6-4 4.4.4 ADF Registration Roller ...... 6-7
4.3.2 Cassette Pickup Roller ......... 6-5 4.4.5 Original Feed Roller ............ 6-7
4.3.3 Manual Feed Pickup 4.4.6 Original Delivery Roller ...... 6-7
Roller ................................... 6-5 4.4.7 Copyboard Glass
4.3.4 Separation Pad ..................... 6-5 (Original Reading Area) ...... 6-8
4.3.5 Registration Roller ............... 6-5
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
1 Standards and Adjustments ................. 7-1 1.2.4.3 Left/Right Edge Read Start
1.1 Checking Against the Standards 7-1 Position Adjustment ....... 7-7
1.1.1 Checking the Pressure (nip) of 1.3 Making Adjustments (ADF) ...... 7-8
the Fixing Pressure Roller ... 7-1 1.3.1 Items of Adjustment and Se-
1.2 Making Adjustments .................. 7-3 quence of Work .................... 7-8
1.2.1 Making Adjustments When Re- 1.3.2 Preparing a Test Sheet for Ad-
placing Major Parts .............. 7-3 justment ............................... 7-8
1.2.2 Preparing a Test Sheet for Ad- 1.3.3 Adjusting the Mechanical Sys-
justment ............................... 7-4 tems ...................................... 7-9
1.2.3 Adjusting the Mechanical Sys- 1.3.3.1 Removing the Skew ........ 7-9
tems ...................................... 7-5 1.3.3.2 Left/Right Registration Ad-
1.2.4 Adjusting the Electrical justment ........................ 7-10
Systems ................................ 7-5 1.3.4 Adjusting the Electrical
1.2.4.1 Contact Sensor LED Inten- Systems .............................. 7-12
sity Auto Adjustment ...... 7-5 1.3.4.1 Registration Arch Auto Ad-
1.2.4.2 Leading Edge Read Start Po- justment ........................ 7-12
sition Adjustment ............ 7-6 1.3.4.2 Original Read Position Ad-
justment ........................ 7-12
x COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001

CONTENTS
1.3.4.3 Original Speed 3.1.8 The output has black lines

Adjustment ................... 7-13 (horizontal). ....................... 7-27
1.3.4.4 Leading Edge Read Start 3.1.9 The output has white spots
Position Adjustment ..... 7-14 (vertical). ............................ 7-27
1.3.4.5 Trailing Edge Read End 3.1.10 The output has white lines
Position Adjustment ..... 7-15 (vertical). ............................ 7-27
1.4 When Replacing a Component 7-16 3.1.11 The output has white spots
1.4.1 When Replacing the Image (horizontal). ....................... 7-28
Processor PCB ................... 7-16 3.1.12 The output has white lines
1.4.1.1 Before Starting the (horizontal). ....................... 7-28
Work ............................. 7-16 3.1.13 The output is soiled. .......... 7-29
1.4.1.2 After Finishing the 3.1.14 The back of the output is
Work ............................. 7-17 soiled. ................................. 7-30
1.4.2 When Replacing the 3.1.15 The output has a fixing
NCU PCB .......................... 7-17 fault. ................................... 7-31
2. Troubleshooting ................................ 7-18 3.1.16 The output has left/right
2.1 Making Initial Checks .............. 7-18 displacement. ..................... 7-32
2.1.1 Site Environment ............... 7-18 3.1.17 The output has a blurry
2.1.2 Checking the Cartridge ...... 7-18 image. ................................ 7-32
2.1.3 Checking the Paper ............ 7-18 3.1.18 The output has poor sharpness
2.1.4 Others ................................ 7-18 (out of focus). .................... 7-33
2.2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart .... 7-19 3.1.19 The output is blank. ........... 7-34
2.3 Making Checks in Response to an 3.1.20 The output is solid black. .. 7-36
Image Fault .............................. 7-20 4 Troubleshooting Malfunctions ......... 7-37
2.3.1 Checking the Originals Against 4.1 Troubleshooting Malfunctions
the Symptom ...................... 7-20 (service error) ........................... 7-37
2.3.2 Copyboard Glass and White 4.2 Troubleshooting Malfunctions
Sheet .................................. 7-20 (other than service error) ......... 7-41
3 Troubleshooting Image Faults .......... 7-21 4.2.1 Power is absent. ................. 7-41
3.1 Troubleshooting Procedure for 4.2.2 The LCD fails to operate. .. 7-41
Image Faults ............................. 7-21 4.2.3 The contact sensor fails to
3.1.1 The output is too light. ...... 7-22 move. ................................. 7-42
3.1.2 The output is too dark. ....... 7-24 4.2.4 The contact sensor LED fails
3.1.3 The output is foggy to go ON. ........................... 7-42
vertically. ........................... 7-25 4.2.5 The speaker fails to generate
3.1.4 The output has fuzzy, black ver- sound. ................................ 7-43
tical lines. ........................... 7-25 4.2.6 The message “INSTALL
3.1.5 The output is foggy CARTRIDGE” fails to go
horizontally. ....................... 7-26 OFF. ................................... 7-43
3.1.6 The output has fuzzy, black 4.2.7 The message “SUPPLY REC.
horizontal lines. ................. 7-26 PAPER” fails to go OFF.
3.1.7 The output has black lines (cassette) ............................ 7-44
(vertical). ............................ 7-27
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001 xi

CONTENTS
4.2.8 The message “SUPPLY REC. 4.5.3.7 Echo Remedy ................ 7-53
PAPER” fails to go OFF. 4.5.3.8 Echo Protect Tone: SW03
(manual feed tray) .............. 7-44 bit 1 of Service Soft
4.2.9 The message “REC. PAPER Switch #1 SSSW .......... 7-53
JAM” fails to go OFF. ........ 7-45 4.5.3.9 Number of Final Flag
4.2.10 The message “PLATEN IS Sequences: SW04 bit 2 of
OPEN CLOSE THE PLATEN Service Soft Switch #1
Unit” fails to go OFF. ........ 7-46 SSSW ............................ 7-53
4.3 Troubleshooting Malfunctions 4.5.3.10 Subaddress .................... 7-54
(if equipped with ADF 4.5.3.11 Password ....................... 7-54
functions) ................................. 7-47 4.5.3.12 Signals .......................... 7-54
4.3.1 Original pickup fails. ......... 7-47 4.5.3.13 Timer ............................. 7-55
4.4 Troubleshooting Malfunctions 4.5.4 HOW TO RECORD THE
(printer functions) .................... 7-48 PROTOCOL ...................... 7-56
4.4.1 Printing fails to start .......... 7-48 4.5.5 Causes and Remedies for User
4.4.2 Printing stops in the Error Codes ........................ 7-57
middle ................................ 7-48 4.5.6 Causes and Remedies for
4.5 Troubleshooting Service Error Codes ........... 7-62
(faults unique to models equipped 4.5.7 Common Faults ................. 7-82
with fax functions) ................... 7-50 5 Troubleshooting Feeding Faults ....... 7-83
4.5.1 Troubleshooting Communica- 5.1 Outline ..................................... 7-83
tion Faults .......................... 7-50 5.2 Paper Jams ............................... 7-84
4.5.2 Service Error Code 5.2.1 Pickup Assembly
Output ................................ 7-52 (cassette) ............................ 7-84
4.5.3 Error Codes ........................ 7-52 5.2.2 Pickup Assembly (manual feed
4.5.3.1 Transmission Level (ATT): tray) .................................... 7-86
No.07 of Service Soft Switch 5.2.3 Feeding Assembly ............. 7-88
#2 MENU ..................... 7-52 5.2.4 Fixing Delivery
4.5.3.2 NL Equalizer: No.05 of Assembly ........................... 7-90
Service Soft Switch #2 5.2.5 Checking the Rotation of the
MENU .......................... 7-52 Rollers and Gears .............. 7-91
4.5.3.3 Transmission Page Timer: 5.2.5.1 Checking the Rotation of the
SW12 of Service Soft Switch Cassette Pickup Roller and
#1 SSSW ....................... 7-52 the Vertical Path
4.5.3.4 T0 Timer: No.10 of Service Roller ............................ 7-91
Soft Switch #3 NUMERIC 5.2.5.2 Checking the Rotation of the
param. ........................... 7-52 Registration Roller and the
4.5.3.5 T1 Timer: No.11 of Service Gear for the Photosensitive
Soft Switch #3 NUMERIC Drum ............................. 7-91
param. ........................... 7-53 5.3 Original Jams (if equipped with
4.5.3.6 RTN Signal Transmission ADF functions) ........................ 7-92
Condition: No. 02, 03, and 5.4 Feeding Faults .......................... 7-93
04 of Service Soft Switch #3 5.4.1 Double Feeding ................. 7-93
NUMERIC param. ........ 7-53 5.4.2 Wrinkles ............................ 7-94
xii COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001

CONTENTS
5.5 Faulty Feeding of Originals 6.2.2 Sensors ............................. 7-100

(if equipped with ADF 6.2.2.1 Body ........................... 7-100
functions) ................................. 7-95 6.2.2.2 ADF (if eqquiped with ADF
5.5.1 Double Feeding ................. 7-95 functions) .................... 7-101
5.5.2 Skew .................................. 7-95 6.2.3 Others .............................. 7-102
6 Arrangement of the Electrical Parts .. 7-96 6.2.4 PCBs ................................ 7-104
6.1 Checking the 6.3 Variable Resistors, Light Emitting
Photointerrupters ...................... 7-96 Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by
6.2 Arrangement and Functions of PCB ........................................ 7-106
Electrical Components ............. 7-98 6.3.1 Image Processor PCB ...... 7-106
6.2.1 Solenoids, Motors, Fans .... 7-98 6.3.2 DC Controller PCB ......... 7-107
6.2.1.1 Body ............................. 7-98
6.2.1.2 ADF (if eqquiped with ADF
functions) ...................... 7-99
APPENDIX
1 General Timing Chart ........................ A-1
2 General Circuit Diagram .................... A-3
3 List of Special Tools .......................... A-5
4 List of Solvents and Oils ................... A-6
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001 xiii

CHAPTER 1
PRODUCT OUTLINE

1 Specifications
1.1 Type
Item Specifications
Body Desk top (ADF standard type, copyboard standard type)
Copyboard glass Fixed
Light source LED
Lens CIS (contact sensor)
Photosensitive medium OPC drum (30-mm dia.)
1.2 Mechanisms
Item Specifications
Reproduction Indirect electrostatic
Charging Roller contact
Exposure Semiconductor laser
Copy density adjustment Auto or manual
Development Dry, 1-component toner projection
Pickup Cassette: 1 cassette
Multifeeder: 1 feeder
Transfer Roller transfer
Separate Static (static eliminator) + curvature
Cleaning Rubber blade
Fixing SURF (on-demand)
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001 1-1

1.3 Functions
Item Specifications
Original type Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)
Maximum original size A4 (297 × 210 mm / 11.7" × 8.3"), LGL (356 × 216 mm / 14.0" × 8.5")
Reproduction ratio 2R2E
Direct 1:1.000
Reduce I 1:0.500
Reduce II 1:0.707
Enlarge I 1:1.414
Enlarge II 1:2.000
Zoom 50% to 200% (1% increments)
Wait time 8.5 sec (after plug in) / 1.0 sec (after pressing Energy Saver key)
First copy time 21.5 sec (after plug in)
18 sec (after pressing Energy Saver key)
Continuous reproduction 99 pages max.
Reproduction size
250-sheet cassette A4
Manual feed tray Width: 76.2 to 216 mm (3.0" to 8.5")
Length: 127 to 356 mm (5.0" to 14.0")
Weight: 56 to 128 g/m2
Paper type
250-sheet cassette Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2)
Manual feed tray Transparency, label, tracing paper, postcard, thick paper (to 128
g/m2), envelope
Cassette Claw separation, front loading
Manual feed tray capacity 10 mm deep, (about 100 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper)
Delivery tray capacity 100 sheets max.
Non-image width Leading edge: 3.0 ± 2.0 mm (0.12" ± 0.08"), left/right edge: 2.5 ±
1.5 mm (0.10" ± 0.06")
AE Yes
Image mode Yes (text, text/photo, photo)
Toner save mode Yes
Special mode Yes: Tracing paper mode, transparency mode, special paper1
mode, special paper2 mode
Auto power-off No
Power save mode Yes (manually ON/OFF, auto OFF after specific time, auto ON
after fax reception/print data reception)
N-on-1 Yes (in some functions, 2-on-1)
1-on-N memory copy Yes
Auto copy start Yes
Jam recovery Yes
Auto clear Yes
Date/time set Yes
1-2 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001

1.4 Others
Item Specifications
Weekly timer Yes
Toner level detection Yes
Cassette paper level detection Yes
LGL size detection Yes
Operating environment
Temperature range 0° to 35°C / 32° to 95°F
Humidity range 35% to 85%
Atmospheric pressure 0.61 to 1.01 hPa (0.6 to 1 atm)
range
Power supply 230V (50/60Hz)
Serial number UGAxxxx UKAxxxx
UHAxxxx UUKxxxx
UIAxxxx UUMxxxx
UJAxxxx
Power consumption
Maximum 780 W or less
Standby 16 Wh (approx.; reference only)
Operation 280 Wh (approx.; reference only)
Noise
Standby Copyboard type: 40 dB or less (impulse mode)
ADF type: 40 dB or less (impulse mode: reference)
Copying Copyboard type: 66 dB or less (fast mode)
ADF type: 69 dB or less (fast mode: reference)
Ozone 0.05 ppm (Ave.)
(after 50000 pages)
Dimensions
Width Copyboard type: 475 mm (18.7"), ADF type: 475 mm (18.7")
Depth Copyboard type: 442 mm (17.4"), ADF type: 442 mm (17.4")
Height Copyboard type: 295 mm (11.6"), ADF type: 352 mm (13.9")
Weight Copyboard type: 20.5 kg
ADF type: 22.6 kg
Consumables storage
Paper Keep wrapped to avoid humidity.
Toner Avoid direct sunshine, and store between 0° and 35°C / 32° and
95°F, between 35% and 85%.

1.5 Copying Speed
Ratio Size Paper size copies/min

Cassette Manual
feed tray*1
Direct A4 (210 × 297mm / 8.3" × 11.7") A4 12 12
A5 (149 × 210mm / 5.9" × 8.3") A5 - 13
Reduce I (50.0%) A4R → postcard postcard - 13

Reduce II (70.7%) A4R → A5R A5 - 13
Enlarge I (141.4%) A5R → A4R A4 12 12

Enlarge II (200.0%) postcard → A4R A4 12 12
*1: If the manual feed tray is in use, the copying speed is indicated assuming that the paper
size setting is correct.
The machine performs 3-step copying speed reduction control designed to prevent crack-
ing of the fixing heater, otherwise possibly occurring as a result overheating of the ends of
the fixing assembly. (See 5.4 of Chapter 4.)

1.6 ADF (if equipped with ADF functions)
Items Specifications
Pickup Auto pickup/delivery (top separation by double-pad)
Original type Single-sided sheet (50 to 128 g/m2)
Original size A4R, B5R, A5R, B6, LGL, LTRR, STMTR
Length: 128 to 356 mm (5" to 14"), width: 139 to 216 mm (5.5" to
8.5")
Original orientation Face-down
Original position Center reference
Original processing mode From single-sided to single-sided
Original reading Stream reading
Stack 30 sheets or less (if A4/LTR or smaller)
15 sheets or less (if LGL)
Mixed original sizes Yes (only if of the same paper configuration)
Original AE detection No
Original size recognition No
Stamp No
Power supply From host (5 VDC and 24 V)
Operating environment Same as host
The machine may not be able to handle the following types of originals:
• original with a carbon back
• original made of multiple layers (pasted, bound)
• original with a cut-off, 5 or more holes, or tear
• original with a clip, adhesive tape, or glue
• original with curling, wrinkling, or appreciable bending
• transparency
Advise the user to remove as much curling as possible, if any, and place the original in the
original tray so that the side with the curling is the trailing edge.

1.7 FAX (if equipped fax functions)

1.7.1 Communications specifications
Applicable lines
Analog line (one line)
• PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)
Transmission method
Half-duplex
Transmission control protocol

ITU-T T.30 binary protocol/ECM protocol
Modulation method
G3 image signals ITU-T V.27ter (2.4kbps, 4.8kbps)
ITU-T V.29 (7.2kbps, 9.6kbps)
ITU-T V.17 (14.4kbps, 12kbps, TC9.6kbps, TC7.2kbps)
G3 procedure signals ITU-T V.21 (No.2) 300bps
Transmission speed
14.4k, 12k, TC9.6k, TC7.2k, 9.6k, 7.2k, 4.8k, 2.4kbps
With automatic fallback function
Coding
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Error correction
ITU-T ECM
Canon express protocol

None
Transmission output level

from 0 to -15 dBm
Minimum receive input level

-43 dBm
Modem IC
CONEXANT FM214

1.7.2 Scanner section specifications
Scanning method
Contact sensor scanning method
Scanning line density

Horizontal:
Standard/Fine/Superfine 203.2 dpi (8 dots/mm)
Ultrafine 406.4 dpi (16 dots/mm) (Interpolated)
Vertical:
Standard 97.79 dpi (3.85 lines/mm)
Fine 195.58 dpi (7.7 lines/mm)
Superfine/Ultrafine 391.16 dpi (15.4 lines/mm)
Scanning density adjustment

Light, Standard, Dark: The density level of each mode can be selected
by the user mode menu.
Half tone
64-gradation error diffusion system
1.7.3 Printer section specifications
Printing resolution
600dpi × 600dpi
Reduction for reception

Fixed reduction (75%, 90%, 95%, 97%)
Auto reduction (70~100%)

1.7.4 Functions
STAMP
None
FAX/TEL switching
Method CNG detection
Message None
Pseudo CI None
Answering machine connection

Yes (Telephone answering priority type)
CNG detection
DPRD
Yes
Polling
Polling transmission
None
Polling reception
Receives from a fax in automatic transmission mode
One touch locations Max. 12
Confidential reception
None
Confidential transmission
None
Remote reception
Method ID call# (ID input method)
Remote ID (with ID call#) 2 digits (Default : 25)
Memory reception
Yes

Auto dialing
Telephone number digits Average 39 digits
One-touch dial Max. 12
Coded speed dial Max. 100
Group dial Max. 111 (One-touch : 11, Coded speed dial : 100)
Redial Numeric button redial function (max. 120 digits)
Delayed transmission
Locations Max. 122 (One-touch : 12, Coded speed dial : 100)
Numeric button: 10)
No. of reseruation Max. 20
Broadcast transmission
Locations Max. 122 (One-touch : 12, Coded speed dial : 100)
Numeric button: 10)
Group button addresses Max. 111 (One-touch : 11, Coded speed dial : 100)
Relay broadcasting originating

None
Relay broadcasting
None
Closed network
None
Direct mail prevention

None
Dual access
File No. of reservation Max. 21 files

Activity management
a) User report
Activity report
(Every 20 transactions)
TX/RX report
1-touch spd dial list
Coded speed dial list
Group dial list
Memory clear list
User data list
Multi activity report
Document memory list
b) Service report
System data list
System dump list
Key history report
Counter report
Print spec report
Transmitting terminal identification

Items Time, telephone No. (max 20 digits), senders ID, address,
number of transmitted pages (max 3 digits)
Address Can be registered with one-touch/ coded speed dial keys
(16 characters)
Senders ID 20 characters (1 name)
Program key
None
Redial
Interval 2 min. (from 2 to 99 min. can be selected in user data)
Count 2 times (from 1 to 10 times can be selected in user data)
Memory backup
Backup contents dial registration data, user data, service data, time
Backup IC 128 Kbyte SRAM
Backup battery Lithium battery 3.0 V DC / 560 mAh
Battery life Approx. 5 years

Image data backup

Backup contents Memory reception, delayed transmission
and broadcast transmission image data, activity
management report
Backup IC 8 Mbyte SDRAM
Backup coding method JBIG
Backup battery Rechargeable vanadium lithium battery 3.0V DC/ 50 mAh
Battery life 40 cycles with 100% discharge
(Temperature 77°F (25°C))
Time
precision ±60 sec per month
The foregoing specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

2 Names of Parts
2.1 External View
2.1.1 Body (ADF type)
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[12] [1]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8] [6]
[7]
F01-201-01
[1] Reader unit slide lever [7] Cassette

[2] Reader unit [8] Delivery tray
[3] White sheet [9] Power cord connector assembly
[4] White roller [10] Modular cable connector assembly*1
[5] Copyboard glass [11] USB cable connector assembly
[6] Control panel [12] Parallel interface cable connector assembly
*1: If equipped with fax functions.

2.1.2 Body (copyboard type)
[3]
[4]
[2]
[10] [1]
[9]
[8]
[7] [5]
[6]
F01-201-02
[1] Reader unit slide lever [6] Cassette

[2] Reader unit [7] Delivery tray
[3] Copyboard cover [8] Power cord connector assembly
[4] Copyboard glass [9] USB cable connector assembly
[5] Control panel [10] Parallel interface cable connector assembly

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F01-201-03
[1] Cartridge cover [4] Right door

[2] Cartridge [5] Shipping screw slot
[3] Manual feed tray

2.1.3 ADF (if equipped with ADF functions)
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
F01-201-04
[1] Original placement area [3] Delivery slot

[2] Open/close cover [4] Slide guide

2.2 Cross Section

2.2.1 Body
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[23] [22] [20] [18] [16] [14] [12]

[21] [19] [17] [15] [13] [11]
F01-202-01
[1] Contact sensor [13] Registration roller

[2] Copyboard [14] Cassette pickup roller
[3] Laser scanner motor unit [15] Developing cylinder
[4] Laser unit [16] Transfer charging roller
[5] Reflecting mirror [17] Separation static eliminator
[6] Cartridge [18] Photopositive drum
[7] Reader unit [19] Fixing film unit
[8] Registration shutter [20] Fixing pressure roller
[9] Manual feed pickup roller [21] Delivery roller
[10] Manual feed tray [22] Cassette
[11] Right door [23] Delivery tray
[12] Vertical path roller

2.2.2 ADF (if equipped with ADF functions)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7]
[8]
[14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9]

F01-202-02
[1] Slide guide [8] Original feed roller

[2] Open/close cover [9] Contact sensor (body)
[3] Original pickup roller [10] White roller
[4] Original separation roller [11] ADF registration roller
[5] Original delivery tray [12] Registration sensor
[6] Original delivery roller [13] Original separation pad
[7] Delivery external guide [14] Original sensor

3 Safety and Warnings

3.1 Safety of Laser Light
3.1.1 Safety of the Laser Unit
The radiation from a laser until can be harmful to the human body. The machine’s laser
optical unit is sealed by means of a protective housing and external covers, so that the light
it produces will not escape outside, ensuring the safety of the user as long as the machine is
used under normal conditions.
3.1.2 CDRH Requirements

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the US Department of Health
and Human Services put into force a set of requirements with a view to regulating laser-re-
lated products on August 2, 1976. The requirements apply to laser products produced on
August 1, 1996, or later, and all laser products must comply with them if they are to be mar-
keted in the US. The following is the label that indicates the compliance with the CDRH re-
quirements, and it must be attached to all laser products that are sold in the US.
O
K
7
0
4
8
#
1
5
9
2
6
3
F01-301-01
The text may differ from product to product or from model to model.

3.1.3 Handling the Laser Unit

When servicing the area around the machine’s laser optical unit, take full care not to put
any tool with a high reflectance (e.g., screwdriver) into the laser path. Be sure also to re-
move any watch, ring, or the like, as they can reflect the laser beam to damage your eye. The
machine’s laser light is red, and its covers that can reflect the laser beam are identified using
the following label. The laser scanner unit of this model cannot be adjusted in the field.
Fa
x Mo
nitor
Re Memo 01
fer
en ry
ce 02
Re R
po 07
rt
Tra De
nsmilayed
03 D.T. Fu
nctio
Bo
ssion
04 Tone
08 Ra n
ok dia Ad
Se /+ l / Pa dition
nd
ing 05 Sp
09 use al Fu
ace Co
rde nctio
06 De
10 d Di
al ns
lete Direc
11 Re
try
Clea cie Co
r ve llate
12 Mo
de
Re Send
solut ing 2 In
ion 1
Co
py
Ra
tio Set
Ex
po CO
sure PY
Pa
Im
ag
pe
r Se
lec
t GH
I
1 AB
C
FA
X
e Qu
ality PQ
RS
4 JK
L
2 DE
F In
Us
e/
7 TU
V
5 MN
O
3 Sto
Me
mo
ry
Ala
En
erg
y Se
TO OP
8 WXY
Z
6 p/
Res
rm rve
et
NE
0 ER
SY
MB
9
# OL
S Sta
rt
F01-301-02
The label is attached to covers inside the machine used to block out laser
radiation.

3.2 Safety of the Toner

The machine’s toner is a non-toxic material consisting of plastic, iron, and small amounts
of dye. If toner came into contact with your skin or clothes, remove as much of it as possible
with dry tissue, and wash with water. Do not use hot water, as it will turn the toner into a
jelly and cause it to permanently fuse with the fibers of the clothes. Also, do not bring toner
into contact with vinyl material, as they are likely to react against each other.
Do not throw toner into fire. It may explode.
3.3 Storing and Handling the Cartridge

Whether it is left packed or unpacked, or is fitted to the machine, the cartridge is subject
to the effects of the environment, and will deteriorate over time. The speed of deterioration
depends on the site or storage condition, and cannot be generalized. Take full care when
storing or handing it.
3.3.1 Storing a Cartridge Before Unpacking
If the cartridge is to be stored in a storeroom or a workshop, be sure to refer to T01-303-

01, and keep the following in mind:
• Avoid direct sunshine.
• Avoid vibration.
• Avoid impact. (Take care not to drop it.)

Temperature
Normal (9/10 of total storage period) 0~35˚C/32~95˚F
High 35~40˚C/95~104˚F
Severe (1/10 of total storage period)
Low -20~0˚C/-4~32˚F
40~15˚C/104~59˚F
Change in temperature (within about 3 min)
-20~25˚C/-4~77˚F
Normal (9/10 of total storage period) 35~85%RH

Humidity
High 85~95%RH
Severe (1/10 of total storage time)
Low 10~35%RH
Atmospheric pressure 0.61~1.01hpa
Effective period of cartridge 2.5 yr (approx.)
T01-303-01
3.3.2 Storing or Handling the Cartridge After Unpacking
The photosensitive medium is made of organic photo-conducting material (OPC), and

will deteriorate if exposed to strong light. It is also used to hold toner inside it. Be sure to
advise the user to be fully careful when storing and handling the cartridge. (The cartridge
must always be put inside a protective bag for storage.)
3.3.2.1 Storing After Unpacking

a. Use a protective bag for storage.
b. Avoid areas subject to direct sunshine (e.g., near a window). Do not leave it alone inside
a card, as the temperature can rise to an extremely high level. (These are also true even if
the cartridge is put in a protective bag.)
c. Avoid areas subject to high temperature/humidity or low temperature/humidity, areas
subject to rapid changes in temperature or humidity, or areas subject to condensation
(e.g., near an air conditioner).
d. Avoid areas exposed to corrosive gas (e.g., insecticide) or salty air.
e. Avoid areas subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent gas.

f. Avoid areas near a CRT display, disk drive, and floppy disk. (The magnetism from the
cartridge can destroy the data.)
g. Keep it out of reach of children.
h. Keep the temperature between 0° and 35°C (32° and 95°F).
3.3.2.2 Points to Note When Handling the Cartridge

a. When fitting the cartridge to the machine, on if white spots start to occur in copy images
caused by decreasing toner, hold the cartridge level as shown in F01-303-01, and rock it
about 90° to both sides 5 to 6 times, thereby evening out the toner inside it. Do not
shake the cartridge in ways not indicated; otherwise, toner can start to leak from the
cleaner assembly.
F01-303-01
To fully prevent soling of output images caused by toner leakage, be sure to make 3 to 5
test copies after fitting the cartridge in the machine.

b. Do not place the cartridge on its end or upside down as shown in F01-303-02. Also, do
not swing it.
F01-303-02
c. Do not open the shutter for the photosensitive drum found under the cartridge and touch
the surface of the drum.
d. Do not disassemble the cartridge.
e. Do not subject the cartridge to unnecessary vibration or impact. In particular, do not
force down on the photosensitive drum through the shutter found under the cartridge.
f. Do not keep the cartridge inside the machine when moving the machine. Be sure to put
the cartridge in its protective bag, or wrap it in thick cloth to avoid light.
g. Do not place the cartridge near a CRT display, disk drive, or floppy disk, as the magne-
tism from the cartridge can destroy the data.
h. Keep the cartridge out of reach of children.
i. The photosensitive drum is susceptible to light, thus the presence of a shutter under the
cartridge. If exposed to strong light for a long time, the copies may start to develop
white spots or vertical bands. These faults may disappear if the machine is left at rest for
some time, or the memory (cause of the faults) may remain permanently.
If you must take out the cartridge from the machine, be sure to put it in its
protective bag, or cover it. Never leave it alone unprotected.

j. Advise the user to send all used cartridges to the designated place.
Do not throw a cartridge (used or not used) into fire. It may burst or ex-
plode.
If the photosensitive drum is exposed to 1500 lux (general light) for 5 min
and then left alone for 5 min in a dark place, it may recover to a level that
Memo will not cause practical problems. Nevertheless, avoid direct sunshine by all
means, which is as strong as 10000 to 30000 lux.

CHAPTER 2
USING THE MACHINE

1 Using the Machine

The functions and LEDs found in the machine’s control panel are as follows:
1.1 Control Panel

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
Function
Fax Monitor R
Redial / Pause
ABC DEF
Memory D.T.
Reference
Coded Dial
Report Tone/+ GHI JKL MNO

Directory
OK
Delayed Space
Transmission Receive Mode PQRS TUV WXYZ
Book Sending Delete

Fax Resolution
Clear
[20] [19] [18]

[22] [21] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]
F02-101-01
[1] Additional Functions Key

Press it to bring up the user mode menu for making various settings and registering
items. The key flashes when the machine is in user mode menu, and goes OFF in re-
sponse to a press.
[2] LCD
Use it to refer to the Copy/Fax basic screen, various Settings screens, and error mes-
sages.
[3] Collate Key
Press it to select sorting. The key remains ON when the machine is in sort mode, and
goes OFF in response to a press.
[4] 2 on 1 Key
Press it to reduce 2 originals automatically and on a single sheet.
[5] Copy Key*1
Press it when using a copier function. The key remains ON when the machine is in
copier mode.

[6] Fax Key*1

Press it when using a fax function. The key remains ON when the machine is in fax mode.
[7] In Use/Memory Lamp*1
It goes ON when an original has been read, a delayed fax transmission has been se-
lected, or memory reception has been used. Further, it flashes while fax transmission is
under way.
[8] Alarm Lamp
It flashes when a fault has occurred in the machine (e.g., paper jam).
[9] Energy Saver Key
Press it to manually select or deselect energy save mode. It remains ON when the ma-
chine is in energy save mode, and goes OFF when the machine leaves the mode.
[10] Stop/Reset Key
Press it to stop making copies or transmitting a fax. Or, press it to reset the machine
white making mode settings (i.e., to return copier/fax mode to standard mode).
[11] Start Key
Press it to start making a copy or sending a fax.
[12] # Key
Press it to enter a “symbol” when registering fax/telephone number or when entering a
fax telephone number.
[13] Keypad
Use it to enter a copy count or a value for Zoom, or when entering a fax telephone
number.
[14] * Key
Press it to generate a tone signal from a dial (pulse) circuit when using a fax function.
[15] Right Arrow/+ Key
Press it to add a value when making various settings or to indicate the next setting or
an item.
[16] Image Quality Key
Press it to select a copy image quality type (text, text/photo, photo).
[17] Paper Select Key
Press it to select a source of paper (cassette, manual feed).
[18] OK Key
Press it to store various selections or settings.
[19] Exposure Key
Press it to change the copy density. (auto, or manual from 9 steps)
[20] Enlarge/Reduce Key
Press it to select a default Enlarge/Reduce ratio or Zoom.
[21] Left Arrow/- Key
Press it to subtract a value when making various settings or to indicate the previous
setting or an item.
[22] One-Touch/Fax Function Key (after a press on the Function key)*1
Press it to dial a pre-registered telephone number. A press on the Function key will
cause it to serve as the Fax Function key.

[1] [2] [3]
Function
[18] [4]
Fax Monitor R
Redial / Pause
[17] Memory D.T. [5]
Reference
Coded Dial
[16] [6]
Report Tone/+
Directory
[15] [7]
Delayed Space
Transmission Receive Mode
[14] [8]
Book Sending Delete
Fax Resolution
[13] [9]
Clear
[12] [11] [10]

F02-101-02
[1] Tone/+ Key*1

Press it to generate a tone from a dial circuit. Press it to enter a + symbol when regis-
tering a telephone number.
[2] D.T. Key*1
Press it to use a D.T. function.
[3] R Key*1
Press it to use an R function.
[4] Function Key*2
Press it to use the function key. A press on the Function key will cause the key to go
ON, and another press will cause it to go OFF.
[5] Redial/Pause Key*1
Press it to redial a number that has been dialed using the keypad (as in fax wait). When
entering a telephone number, it services as a Pause key.
*1: If equipped with fax functions; or only when the Function key is ON.

[6] Coded Dial Key*1

Press it to use speed dialing.
[7] Directly Key*1
Use it to search for a one-touch or speed number using a name.
[8] Receive Mode Key*1
Press it to change the reception mode (auto, manual).
[9] FAX Resolution Key*1
Use it to change the transmission resolution (standard, fine, halftone, super fine, ultra
fine).
[10] Clear Key*2
Press it to clear various settings that have been registered or made. Also, press it to de-
lete all telephone number/text input.
[11] Delete Key*2
Use it to delete a single character input.
[12] Space Key*2
Press it to put a space in a telephone number or a string of characters.
[13] M or E Key*2
Press it to use a function/service (after selecting ‘yes’ for the M/E key in user mode;
this is effective only if the country is set to “U.K.” or “SPAIN”.
[14] Book Send Key*2
Press it to transmit multiple originals using the copyboard glass.
[15] Delayed Transmission Key*2
Press it to set a transmission time.
[16] Report Key*2
Press it to print out a communication-related report, dial list, user data list, or docu-
ment memory list.
[17] Memory Reference Key*2
Press it to check the file that has been processed by memory transmission or memory
reception.
[18] Fax Monitor Key*2
Press it to check the state of a fax communication.
*1: If equipped with fax functions; or only when the Function key is ON.
*2: Enabled only if the machine is equipped with fax functions. Also, it is enabled only
while the Function key is lit.

2 User Mode
2.1 User Mode Menu
A press on the Additional Functions key in the control panel brings up the user mode
menu. On the user mode menu, press the left/right arrow key to make menu settings or in-
crease/decrease a value; press the OK key to store the selected input.
The user mode menu is constructed as follows:
1. COMMON SETTINGS
*1
1.DEFAULT SETTINGS
COPY
FAX
2.SW AFTER AUTO CLR*1
DEFAULT MDOE
CURRENT MODE
3.VOLUME CONTROL*1
1.KEYPAD VOLUME
ON
VOLUME1~3
OFF
2.ALARM VOLUME*1
ON
VOLUME1~3
OFF
3.TX DONE TONE
ON
VOLUME1~3
ERROR ONLY
VOLUME1~3
OFF
4.RX DONE TONE
ON
VOLUME1~3
ERROR ONLY
VOLUME1~3
OFF
*1: Only if equipped with fax functions.

1. COMMON SETTINGS
3.VOLUME CONTROL*1
5.PRINTING END TONE
ON
VOLUME1~3
ERROR ONLY
VOLUME1~3
OFF
6.SCANNING END TONE
ON
VOLUME1~3
ERROR ONLY
VOLUME1~3
OFF
7.CALLING VOLUME
ON
VOLUME1~3
OFF
8.LINE MONITOR VOL.
ON
VOLUME1~3
OFF
4.MP TRAY PAPERSIZE
OFF
MP PAPERSIZE
FREE SIZE
SET ON LOADING
ON
MP PAPERSIZE
A4
B5
A5
LGL
LTR
STMT
CUSTOM PAER SIZE
1.VERTICAL SIZE 76~216mm
2.HORIZONTAL SIZE 127~356mm

1. COMMON SETTINGS
5.CAS.PAPER SIZE
A4
LTR/LGL
B5
FOLIO
FOOLSCAP
6.PRINT EXPOSURE
5 settings
7.MP PAPERTYPE
PLAIN PAPER
TRACING PAPER
TRANSPARENCY
SPECIAL PAPER 1
SPECIAL PAPER 2
8.HIGH COPY MODE
ON
OFF
9.TONER SAVER MODE
ON
OFF
10.PRT FEED INTERVAL
LONG INTERVAL
NORMAL INTERVAL
11.DISPLAY LANGUAGE*1
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
GERMAN
ITALIAN
DUTCH
FINNISH
PORTUGUESE
NORWEGIAN
SWEDISH
DANISH
CZECH
HUNGARIAN
RUSSIAN

2. COPY SETTINGS
1.STD. IMAGEQUALITY
TEXT ORIGINAL
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
2.STANDARD EXPOSURE
AUTO
MANUAL
9 settings
3.STD ZOOM RATIO
50~200%
4.STANDARD COPY QTY
01~99
5.AUTO SORT
ON
OFF
6.MAX. SCAN LENGTH
330mm
365mm
7.PAPER SIZE GROUP
INCH
A
AB
8. SHARPNESS
1~9

3.FAX SETTINGS*1
1.USER SETTINGS
1.TEL LINE SETTINGS
1.USER TEL NO.
2.TEL LINE TYPE
TOUCH TONE
ROTARY PULSE
3.TX START SPEED
14400bps
9600bps
7200bps
4800bps
2400bps
4.RX START SPEED
14400bps
9600bps
7200bps
4800bps
2400bps
2.UNIT NAME

3.FAX SETTINGS*1
1.USER SETTINGS
3.TX TERMINAL ID
ON
1.TTI POSITION
OUTSIDE IMAGE
INSIDE IMAGE
2.TEL NUMBER MARK
FAX
TEL
OFF
4.DENSITY CONTROL
LIGHT
STANDARD
DARK
5.PROG. 1-TOUCH KEY
01~12
USE
DO NOT USE
6.OFFHOOK ALARM
ON
OFF
7.R-KEY SETTING
PSTN
PBX
HOOKING
EARTH CONNECTION
PREFIX
8.M-KEY SETTING/E-KEY SETTING*2
2.REPORT SETTINGS
1.TX REPORT
OUTPUT NO
PRINT ERROR ONLY
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE
ON
OFF
OUTPUT YES
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE
ON
OFF

*2: “M-KEY SETTING” is usable only when #5 TYPE in service mode is set to “U.K.”
“E-KEY SETTING” is usable only when #5 TYPE in service mode is set to “SPAIN.”

3.FAX SETTINGS*1
2.REPORT SETTINGS
2.RX REPORT
OUTPUT NO
PRINT ERROR ONLY
OUTPUT YES
3.ACTIVITY REPORT
ON
OFF
3.TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
ON
OFF
2.PAUSE TIME
01~15SEC
3.AUTO REDIAL
ON
1.REDIAL TIMES
01~10TIMES
2.REDIAL INTERBAL
02~99MIN.
3.TX ERROR RESEND
ON
RESEND TX FROM
ERROR & 1 PG
ERROR PAGE
ALL PAGES
OFF
OFF
4.ERASE FAILED TX
OFF
ON
5.TIME OUT
ON
OFF

3.FAX SETTINGS*1
4.RX SETTINGS
1.ECM RX
ON
OFF
2.FAX/TEL OPT. SET
1.RING START TIME
01~30SEC
2.F/T RING TIME
015~300SEC
3.F/T SWITCH ACTION
RECEIVE
DISCONNECT
3.INCOMING RING
OFF
ON
RING COUNT
01~99TIMES
4.MAN/AUTO SWITCH
OFF
ON
F/T RING TIME
01~99SEC
5.REMOTE RX
ON
REMOTE RX ID
00~99
OFF

3.FAX SETTINGS*1
5.PRINTER SETTINGS
1.RX REDUCTION
ON
1.RX REDUCTION
AUTO SELECTION
FIXED REDUCTION
97%
95%
90%
75%
2.SELECT REDUCE DIR
VERTICAL ONLY
HORIZ & VERTICAL
OFF
2.TONER SUPPLY LOW
KEEP PRINTING
RX TO MEMORY
6. SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.FAX DEFAULT
1.RESOLUTION
OFF
STANDARD
FINE
PHOTO
SUPER FINE
ULTRA FINE
2.BOOK TX SCAN SIZE
A4
A5
SHEET
2.LOCKPHONE
ON
OFF

4.ADRS REGISTRATION*1
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
01~12
1.TEL NUMBER ENTRY
2.NAME
3.OPTIONAL SETTING
ON
1.TX TIME SETTING
2.TX TYPE
REGULAR TX
SUBADDRESS TX
POLLING RX
OFF
2.CODED SPD DIAL
*00~*99
3.GROUP DIAL
01~12
1.TEL NUMBER ENTRY
2.NAME
3.TX TIME SETTING
1~5

5.TIMER SETTINGS
1.DATE/TIME SETTING
2.AUTO CLEAR
ON
AUTO CLEAR TIME
1~9MIN.
OFF
3.ENERGY SAVER
ON
ENERGY SVR TIME
03~30MIN.
OFF
4.DAILY TIMER SET
1.SUN
2.MON
3.TUE
4.WED
5.THU
6.FRI
7.SAT
5.DATE SETUP
YYYY MM/DD
MM/DD YYYY
DD/MM YYYY
6.ADJUST./CLEAN
1.ROLLER CLEANING
2.CLEAN ADF ROLLER*1
3.RESTART PRINTER
*1: Only if equipped with ADF functions.

7.PRINT LISTS
1.USER DATA
2.SPEED DIAL LIST*1
1.1-TOUCH LIST
SORT
NO SORT
2.CODED DIAL LIST
SORT
NO SORT
3.1-TOUCH(DETAIL)
SORT
NO SORT
4.CODED(DETAIL)
SORT
NO SORT
5.GROUP DIAL LIST
3.CANCEL REPORT

2.2 User Report

2.2.1 Manually Generating a Report
The user can generate any of the following report manually:
Name of report Operation

User data list Select a report in the user mode menu (2.1 of
1-touch spd dial list*1 Chapter 2). Or, select fax mode. Press Function
1-touch dial spd dial list (detail)*1 key and Report key in this order. Use the Left or
Coded speed dial list*1 Right Arrow key to select a list to print, then
Coded speed dial list (detail)*1 press OK key.
Group dial list*1
Docement memory list*1 Select fax mode. Press Function key and Report
Activity report*1 key in this order. Use the Left or Right Arrow
key to select a list to print, then press OK key.

T02-202-01

2.2.2 Automatically Generating Reports (if equipped with fax functions)
The user can make appropriate settings in user mode so that the following reports may be
generated automatically.
Name of report Settings

TX report Make output settings for auto generation under ‘2.
Error TX report REPORT SETTINGS’ in ‘3. FAX SETTINGS’ of
RX report the user mode menu.
Activity report
Multiple activity report First, enable ‘2. TX REPORT’ under ‘2. REPORT
SETTINGS’ of ‘3. FAX SETTINGS’ on the user
mode menu; a report will be generated if a broad-
cast transmission is used (instead of a TX report).
Memory clear list If the machine remains without power for a spe-
cific period of time (about 2 hr or more) while an
image exists in its memory, the power of the vana-
dium lithium secondary battery (BAT2) will be-
come exhausted. A report will automatically be
generated when the machine is turned on.
T02-202-02

2.2.2.1 Memory Clear List
07/30/2001 17:52 FAX 001
*** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * MEMORY CLEAR REPORT * * *
*** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
MEMORY FILES DELETED
TX/RX NO MODE DESTINATION TEL/ID PGS. SET TIME ST. TIME

0002 DELAYED TX 1 07/30 13:51 13:59
0002 DELAYED TX 1 07/30 13:51 13:51
0002 MEMORY RX 1 07/30 13:53 -----
0002 MEMORY RX 1 07/30 13:54 -----
F02-202-01
TX/RX NO : date/time (in 24-hr notation)

MODE : start of storage (in 24-hr notation)
DESTINATION TEL/ID :
PGS. :
SET TIME :
ST. TIME :
4-digit indication
transmission, delayed transmission, or reception
one-touch dial/speed dial number, abbreviation of
other party
number of pages stored

3 Service Mode
3.1 Outline
The following items may be checked or set in the machine’s service mode, which consists
of those found in existing fax machines. You may use them as you would on a fax machine.
The machine’s service mode items are grouped into the following 15 blocks:
#1 SSSW: service soft switch

Use it to register/set basic fax functions (e.g., error control, echo remedy, communica-
tion error correction).
#2 MENU: menu switch settings

Use it to register/set items related to functions needed at time of installation (e.g., NL
equalizer, transmission level).
#3 NUMERIC param: numerical parameter settings

Use it to enter a numerical parameter for various functions related to the FAX/TEL
switch-over.
#4A SPECIAL: Do not change.
#4B NCU: Do not change.

This item is set in conjunction with the setting of #5 TYPE so that the settings will
comply with the communications standards of a specific country/region.
#4C ISDN: not used
#5 TYPE: country/region setting

Use it to select a country/region from the list so that the setting of #1 through #4 will
comply with the communications standards of the selected country/region.
#6 SCANNER: partially available for service

Do not change the settings except ‘7: CCD’, used to adjust the image position; other-
wise, the read image quality can adversely be affected.
#7 PRINTER: printer function settings

Use it to register/set items related to printer basic service functions (e.g., conditions for
reducing received images).
#8 PDL: not used
#9 COUNTER: counter information

Use it to check various counter information.

#10 REPORT: report output

Use it to generate a report on various service data.
#11 DOWNLOAD: not used
#12 CLEAR: data initialization mode setting

Use it to initialize various data by selecting a specific item.
#13 ROM: ROM control

Use it to indicate information related to the ROM on the LCD (e.g., ROM version,
checksum).
#14 CS SET: not used
TEST MODE: Use it to execute various testings.

3.2 Using Service Mode
100% L TR
TE XT 01
1) Starting user mode menu.
Press the Additional Functions key.
REG I STRA T I ON / S E T T I NG
1. COMONN SE T T I NGS
2) Selecting service mode menu.
Press the # key on the user mode menu.
S ERV I CE MODE
#1 SSSW
3) Selecting a Menu Item.
Press the Left or Right Arrow key.
S ERV I CE MODE
#3 NUMER I C P a r am.
4) Press the OK key.
001 : 0
5) Registering/Setting Data.
Enter the data using the keypad,
and press the OK key.
001 : 10
6) Selecting a Menu Item.
Press the Left or Right Arrow key.
002 : 10
7) Press the Stop key/Additional Functions key to end service mode.
F02-302-01

3.3 List of Service Mode Menus

service data
#1 SSSW SW01 error/copy control

00010000
(service soft SW02 network connection setting
00000000
switch settings) SW03 echo remedy setting
00000000
SW04 communication fault remedy setting
10000000
SW05 standard function (DIS signal) setting
00000000
SW06 read conditions setting
10010000
SW07 not used
00000000
SW08 not used
00000000
SW09 not used
00000000
SW10 remote control operating setting
00000000
SW11 not used
00000000
SW12 1-page timer setting
00000010
SW13 not used
00000000
SW14 by default paper type;
00000001
metric/inch switch-over
SW15 00000000 not used

SW25 00000000 report indication function setting
SW26 00000000 transmission function setting
F02-303-01
To select the SW number in #1 SSSW, use Paper Select key and Enlarge/
Reduce key. To select a bit, use the Left or Right Arrow key.
Memo
Do not change the following, reserved for the future; SW7 through 9, 11,
13, 15 through 24, 27 through 50.

#2 MENU 001: not used

(menu switch 002: not used
setting) 003: not used
004: not used
005: ON NL equalizer setting
OFF
006: DIAL line monitor setting

SERVICEMAN [1]
SERVICEMAN [2]
OFF
007: 0dBm transmission level setting

1dBm
2dBm
14dBm
15dBm
008: not used
009: not used
010: 17Hz pseudo CI signal frequency setting
25Hz
50Hz
011: items 11 through 20: not used
020:
F02-303-02
Do to change the following, reserved for the future: No. 01 through 04, 8
through 9, 11 through 20.

Initial Range of
setting setting
#3 NUMERIC Param. 001: not used
(numerical 002: 10 (10%) (1~99) RTM signal transmission
parameter setting) condition (1) setting
003: 15 (15times) (2~99) RTM signal transmission
condition (2) setting
004: 12 (12lines) (1~99) RTM signal transmission
(3) setting
005: 4 (4sec) (0~60) NCC pause time
(pre-ID code) setting
006: 4 (4sec) (0~60) NCC pause time
(post-ID code) setting
007: not used
008: not used
009: 6(6 digits) (0~20) direct mail prevention function:
telephone number cross-check,
number of digits
010: 5500 (55sec) (0~9999) T0 timer
011: 3500 (35sec) (0~9999) TS1 timer
012: not used
013: 1300 (13sec) (500~3000) T30 E0L timer
014: not used
015: 120 (1200ms)(0~999) hooking detection time setting
016: 4 (4sec) (0~9) fax/tel switch-over function:
between line acquisition
and pseudo RBTtransmission
017: 100 (1000ms)(0~999) pseudo RBT signal pattern:
ON time setting
018: 0 (0ms) (0~999) pseudo RBT signal pattern:
OFF time (short) setting
019: 200 (2000ms)(0~999) pseudo RBT signal pattern:
OFF time (long) setting
020: 100 (1000ms)(0~999) pseudo CI signal pattern:
ON time setting
021: 0 (0ms) (0~999) pseudo CI signal pattern:
OFF time (short) setting
022: 200 (2000ms)(0~999) pseudo CI signal pattern:
OFF time (long) setting
023: not used
024: 20 (-20dBm) (0~20) pseudo RBT signal transmission l

evel setting
025: 60 (60sec) (0~999) answering phone connection function:
signal monitor length setting
026: not used
027: 3 (30ms) (0~99) V21 low-speed flag preamble
detection length setting
028: 3 (3s) (0~60) menu pop-up
time setting
029: not used
080: not used
F02-303-03

Do not use the following, reserved for the future: No. 001, 007, 008, 012,
014, 023, 026, 029 through 080.
#4A SPECIAL
#4B NCU
(NCU setting)
#4C ISDN
#5 TYPE EUROPE
(type setting) U.K.
SWEDEN
SWISS
AUSTRIA
DENMARK
NORWAY
HOLLAND
BELGUIM
AUSTRALIA
FINLAND
N.Z.
ITALY
SPAIN
PORTUGAL
IRELAND
HONG KONG
MALAYSIA
HUNGARY
SAF
KOREA
CHINA
GERMAN
FRANCE
SINGAPORE
CZECH
SLOVENIA
CANADA
ASIA
POLAND
EUROPE2
STANDARD
USA
F02-303-04
#4A SPECIAL
Do not change the setting.
#4B NCU (NCU setting)

The settings under this item are collectively and automatically set in conjunction with #5
TYPE to suit the communications standards of a specific country/region.
Not used. (Do not change the setting.)

#4C ISDN
Not used.
#5 TYPE
Use it to select a specific country/region from the list so that the settings under #1 through
#4 will comply with the communications standards of the selected country/region.
When changing the TYPE setting, be sure not to select a country/region

which is not the country/region of installation.

#6 SCANNER 1. Bit SW
(scanner function 2. SLICE
setting) 3. GAMMA
4. Numeric
5. LUT 1 fno
6. LUT 2 adj
7. CCD
8. MODEL
#7 PRINTER #1 SSSW SW01 00000000 SW01 through 05: not used

(printer function
setting) SW05 10000000
SW06 00000100 reduction setting
SW07 00000000
SW 07 through 20: not used
SW20 00000000
#2 NUMERIC Param
#3 PRINT COUNT
#4 PRINTER RESET YES= (<)

NO= (>)
#5 MLT CLEANING not used
F02-303-05
To select the SW number in #1 SSSW of #7 PRINTER, use Paper Select

key and Enlarge/Reduce key. To select a bit, use the Left or Right Arrow
Memo
key.
#6 SCANNER (scanner function setting);

The setting of this item can affect the read image quality. A change may be
made to ‘7. CCD’ when adjusting the image position; otherwise, do not use
this item.
Do not change the settings, as they are not in use: #7 PRINTER (printer
function setting); #1 SSSW: SW01 through 05, 07 through 20. Also, do not
change the setting of ‘#2 NUMBER Param’.

#8 PDL
#9 COUNTER TOTAL SERVICE1 service-use total counter 1 indication

SERVICE2 service-use total counter 2 indication
TTL total counter indication
COPY total copy counter indication
PDL-PRT print counter indication

FAX-PRT fax reception print counter indication
RPT-PRTreport print counter indication
SCAN scan counter indication
PICK-UP C1 cassette pickup counter indication
C2 not used
C3 not used
C4 not used
MF manual feed tray pickup counter indication
FEEDER FEED ADF pickup counter indication
JAM TTL machine total jam counter indication
FEEDER ADF jam counter indication

SORTER not used
MF manual feed tray jam counter indication
C1 cassette jam counter indication
C2 not used
C3 not used
C4 not used
MISC not used
F02-303-06
#8 PDL
Not used.

#10 REPORT 1.SERVICE & SYSTEM service mode data, start date, system
dump list output, etc.
2.SERVICE DATA service mode data, start date output
3.SYSTEM DUMP system dump list output
4.KEY HISTORY REPORT recent key presses history

(1800 presses) output
5.BCH LOG REPORT not used
6.COUNTER REPORT counter output
7.PRINT SPEC REPORT specifications output
#11 DOWNLOAD
#12 CLEAR TEL & USER DATA dial registration mode,
user data initialization
USER DATA user data initialization
SERVICE SW SSSW data initialization
SERVICE DATA system dump list initialization
REPORT ACTIVITY communications control

report initialization
JAM not used
ERR not used
ALARM not used
COUNTER counter initialization
CARD not used
ERR not used
ALL total data initialization
#13 ROM MAIN image processor PCB ROM version indication
MAIN2 image processor PCB CPU version indication
ECONT DC controller PCB ROM version indication
PDL not used
#14 CS SET
TEST MODE [1] ~ [6], [8]

F02-303-07
#11 DOWNLOAD
Not used.
#14 CS SET
Not used.

3.4 Bit Switch Settings (#1 SSSW)

A bit switch consists of 8 bits, used for registering/setting an item. The switch is config-
ured as follows, and each bit is always either ‘0’ or ‘1’:
t2
t1
t7
t6
t5
t4
t3
t0
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
SW01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F02-304-01
Do not change service data marked “not used” for its initial setting.
#SSSW-SW01: error/copy control
Bit Function 1 0 Factory setting

0 service error code output do not output 0
1 error dump list output do not output 0
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 user setting restriction do not impose impose 0
[Bit 0]
Use it to specify whether or not to generate a service error code. If set to ‘1’, a service er-
ror code will be indicated on the report.
[Bit 1]
Use it to specify whether or not to generate an error dump list. When set to ‘1’, an error
dump list will be attached to an error TX report or a RX report generated in the event of an
error.
[Bit 7]
Use it to impose or not impose restrictions on user settings. If set to ‘0’, certain items can-
not be set by the user, depending on the country setting. If set to ‘1’, on the other hand, all
items may be set by the user, regardless of the country setting.

#SSSW-SW02: network connection conditions setting

0 start-up at memory clear list out- prohibit do not prohibit 0
put fault
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 0]
Use it to specify whether or not to put the machine in standby state if the memory clear
list is not generated when the power is turned on after an error has occurred (e.g., running
out of paper).
If set to ‘1’, the machine will generate a memory clear list and enters standby state when
the image data is cleared and the power is turned on.
If set to ‘1’, moreover, the following takes place:

1. The alarm sounds, and the machine waits for correction; specifically,
a. The LCD indicates ‘CHECK PRINTER’.
b. The machine will not start reception operation in response to arrival of data.
2. When an appropriate correction is made, the machine will automatically generate a
memory clear list. If an error (e.g., jam) occurs during output, the machine goes back to
1. above.
If set to ‘0’, on the other hand, the machine will sound the alarm and enters standby state.

#1 SSW-SW03: echo remedy setting

0 not used - - 0
1 echo product tone in high-speed transmit do not transmit 0
transmission
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 tonal signal before transmission transmit do not transmit 0
of CED signal
[Bit 1]
Use it to specify whether or not to transmit an echo protection tone for high-speed trans-
mission V.29 (9600 or 7200 bps; modem signal).
If an error occurs often because of a line condition at time of transmission, set it to ‘1’. If
set to ‘1’, unmodulated carrier will be transmitted as a sync signal before transmission of an
image for about 200 msec.
The following error codes are associated with a line condition at time of
transmission:
Memo
##100, ##104, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760, ##765
[Bit 7]
Use it to specify whether or not to transmit a 1080-Hz total signal before transmission of
the CED signal. Set it to ‘1’ if an error occurs often because of an error at time of reception.
The following error codes are associated with an echo at time of reception:
##005, ##101, ##106, ##107, ##114, ##200, ##201, ##790
Memo

#1 SSSW-SW04: communication fault remedy setting

0 Monitor loop current Yes No 0
1 Check CI frequency Yes No 0
2 number of last flag sequence for 2 1 0
procedure signal
3 reception mode after transmis- high-speed high-speed/ 0
sion of CFR signal low-speed
4 length of time during which to 1500ms 700ms 0

ignore low-speed signal after
transmission of CFFR signal
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 CED signal at time of manual do not transmit transmit 1
reception
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to monitor loop current. When ‘Yes’ is selected, if loop current
cannot be detected before dialing, or if the loop current is cut during or transmission, the
line is released.
[Bit 1]
In automatic recieving, CI frequency check can be selected. If ‘Yes’ is selected, the upper
and lower limits of the CI frequency are checked, and automatic recieving can only go
ahead if both values meet German regulations.
[Bit 2]
Use it to specify the number of last flag sequences for the procedure signal (300 bps). Se-
lect ‘2’ if the other party fails to receive the procedure signal transmitted by the machine
normally.
The following error code are associated with transmission:

##100, ##280, ##281, ##750, ##753, ##754, ##755, ##758, ##759, ##760,
Memo ##763, ##764, ##765, ##768, ##769, ##770, ##773, ##775, ##778, ##780,
##783, ##785, ##788,
[Bit 3]
Use it to select reception to use after transmission of the CFR signal.
If an error occurs often because of the line condition at time of reception, set it to ‘1’ and,
at the same time, set ‘ECM RX’ to ‘OFF’ for user data.

The following error codes are associated with the line condition at time of
reception:
Memo ##107, ##114, ##201
Be sure to change bit 4 before changing this bit; resort to this bit only if an
error still occurs.
When set to ‘1’, only high-speed (image) signals will be received after the
transmission of the CFR signal.
[Bit 4]
Use it to select the length of time during which low-speed signals are ignored after trans-
mission of the CFR signal.
Select ‘1500 msec’ if reception of image signals is not good because of a poor line condi-
tion.
[Bit 7]
Use it to specify whether or not to send the CED signal at time of manual reception.
Set it to ‘transmit’ if the other party does not start transmission when manual reception is
initiated.

#1 SSSW-SW05: standard function (DIS signal) setting

0 not used - -
1 execute inch/metric conversion execute do not execute 0
(text mode)
2 execute inch/meter conversion execute do not execute 0
(text/photo mode)
3 transmit bit 33 and thereafter for prohibit do not prohibit 0
DIS signal
4 not used - -
5 LTR/LGL declaration for DIS do not declare declare 0
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 1]
Use it to specify inch/meter conversion in sub scanning direction for images read in text
mode.
[Bit 2]
Use it to specify inch/meter conversion in sub scanning direction for images read in text/
photo mode.
[Bit 3]
Use it specify whether or not to transmit bit 33 and thereafter for the DIS signal.
If ‘prohibit’ is selected, Super Fine reception from a non-Canon machine

can no longer be used.
[Bit 5]
Use it to disable LTR/LGL declaration as a remedy to communication fault when using
LTR or LGL size paper. Selecting “Declare” sends the LTR or LGL declaration by the DIS
signal when an attempt is made to print using LTR or LGL size paper.

#1 SSSW-SW06: read condition setting

0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 original read width LTR A4 1
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 4]
Use it to select a read width for originals.
If ‘LTR’ is selected, the machine will read LTR originals at LTR width (212 mm).
#1 SSSW-SW10: remote control setting

0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 No. of remote reception ID digits 3digits 2digits 0
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 3]
Use it to select the number of digits for remote reception IDs; 2 digits or 3 digits.

#1 SSSW-SW12: page timer setting

0 1-page time-out length for trans- 1 0 0
1 mission/reception 1 0 1
2 1-page time-out length for trans- 1 0 0
3 mission (HT transmission) 1 0 0
4 1-page time-out length for re- 1 0 0
5 ception 1 0 0
6 not used - -
7 page timer setting by transmis- set do not set 0
sion/reception
The machine is designed to stop communication when transmission/reception of a single

page takes 32 min or more. To set a time-out length, refer to the next page.
If ‘1’ is selected for bit 7, the 1-page time-out length will be as set by bit 0 and bit 1.

Time-Out Length for Transmission/Reception

Bit
time-out length 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8 min 0 * * * * * 0 0
16 min 0 * * * * * 0 1
32 min 0 * * * * * 1 0
64 min 0 * * * * * 1 1
Time-Out Length for Transmission (text mode)

Bit
8 min 1 * * * * * 0 0
16 min 1 * * * * * 0 1
32 min 1 * * * * * 1 0
64 min 1 * * * * * 1 1
Time-Out Length for Transmission (image mode other than text mode)
Bit
8 min 1 * * * 0 0 * *
16 min 1 * * * 0 1 * *
32 min 1 * * * 1 0 * *
64 min 1 * * * 1 1 * *
Time-Out Length for Reception

Bit
8 min 1 * 0 0 * * * *
16 min 1 * 0 1 * * * *
32 min 1 * 1 0 * * * *
64 min 1 * 1 1 * * * *

#1 SSSW-SW14: inch/meter resolution setting

0 paper size identification 1 0 0
1 paper size identification 1 0 0
2 inch/meter resolution conversion main/sub scan- sub scanning 1
scanning direction ning only
3 not used - -
4 declare inch resolution declare do not declare 0
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 0, 1]
Use a combination of bit 0 and bit 1 to set the size of paper (default side).
• if 0 and 0, A/B-configured paper.
• if 0 and 1, inch-configured paper
• if 1 and 0, A-configured paper
• if 1 and 1, A/B-configured paper
[Bit 2]
Use it to specify whether to convert an inch resolution into a metric resolution for images
read at time of G3 transmission only in sub scanning direction or in both main and sub scan-
ning direction.
The setting made here is effective only if bit 1 of SW05 of #1 SSSW is set to ‘1’.
[Bit 4]
Use it to specify whether or not to declare an inch resolution to the other party at time of
G3 communication.
If set to ‘1’, a declaration will be made using the DIS, DCS, or DTC signal to the effect
that the machine is designed to read and record images at an inch resolution.
The type of image and the direction of scanning for inch/meter resolution
conversion are determined by combinations of bits 1 and 2 of SW05 and bit
Memo 2 of SW14 of #1 SSSW as well as the type of dialing used.

• When One-Touch Dial/Coded Dial and Keypad/Redial Key Is in Use
SW05 SW14 Image and scanning direction subject to inch/

bit1 bit2 bit2 bit3 meter conversion
0 0 0 - do not execute inch/meter conversion

0 0 1 -
0 1 0 -
0 1 1 -
1 0 0 - text image/sub scanning
1 0 1 - text image/main scanning and sub scanning
1 1 0 - text and photo image/sub scanning
1 1 1 - text and photo image/main and sub scanning

#1 SSSW-SW25: report indication function setting

0 transmission telephone number number of number of 0
indicated on report other party caller
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 0]
Use it to select the number to be indicated on the report, generated at the end of transmis-
sion.
Number of caller: Select it to indicate the telephone number of the caller on the re-
port.
Number of other party: Select it to indicate the telephone number sent by the other party
(CSI signal data).
If a change is made using a means other than one-touch dialing or speed di-
aling, the telephone number sent by the other party (CSI signal data) will be
Memo indicated on the report even when ‘number of caller’ is selected.

#1 SSSW-S26: transmission function setting

0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 broadcast transmission confir- ask do not ask 0
mation
3 broadcast transmission prohibi- ask do not ask 0
tion
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 other party at time of broadcast single party all parties 0
transmission suspension
7 error TX report at time of trans- do not generate generate 0
mission suspension
[Bit 2]
Use it to specify whether or not to indicate a confirm message to prevent the user from
making a broadcast by mistake when entering an address for a broadcast transmission.
[Bit 3]
Use it to specify whether or not to use broadcast transmission to prevent the user from
making a broadcast by mistake when entering an address for a broadcast transmission.
[Bit 6]
Use it to specify whether or not to suspend a communication to all parties when a broad-
cast transmission is suspended.
[Bit 7]
Use it to specify whether or not to generate an error TX report when a transmission is sus-
pended by pressing the Stop key.

3.5 Menu Switch Settings (#2 MENU)
No. Item Selection Initial setting

005 NL equalizer ON, OFF OFF
006 telephone line monitor DIAL/SERVICEMAN DIAL
[1]/SERVICEMAN[2]/OFF
007 transmission level (ATT) 0 through 15 (ex:15=-15dBm) 10
010 pseudo CI signal frequency 50Hz, 25Hz, 17Hz 25Hz
005 NL equalizer
Use it to turn on/off the NL equalizer.
Turn on the NL equalizer if an error occurs often because of the line condition at time of
communication.
transmission.
Memo ##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755,
##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##789
reception
##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793
006 telephone line monitor

Use it to set telephone line motor functions:
DIAL: Select it to generate a monitor sound for the telephone line from
the start of transmission to DIS.
SERVICEMAN [1]: Select it to generate a monitor sound of the telephone line from
the start of a communication to its end.
SERVICEMAN [2]: not used
OFF: Select it to mute the monitor sound for the telephone line for the
speaker.

007 ATT transmission level

Use it to set the transmission level (ATT).
Increase the transmission level if an error occurs often because of the line condition at
time of a communication.
transmission:
Memo ##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##284,
##750, ##752, ##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760, ##762, ##764, ##765,
##767, ##769, ##770, ##772, ##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782,
##784, ##785, ##787, ##789
reception:
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
010 pseudo CI signal

Use it to set a frequency for the pseudo CI signal.
At times, certain types of external telephones fail to ring while fax/tel switch-over takes
place. If so, change the frequency of the pseudo CI signal.

3.6 Numeric Parameter Setting (#3 NUMERIC Param.)

No. Item Range of settings Initial setting
02 RTN transmission condition (1) 1 to 99% 10
03 RTN transmission condition (2) 2 to 99 times 15
04 RTN transmission condition (3) 1 to 99 lines 12
05 NCC pause length (pre-ID code) 0 to 60 sec 4
06 NCC pause length (post-ID code) 0 to 60 sec 4
09 number of digits of telephone numbers in 0 to 20 digits 6
comparison between transmitting and receiv-
ing machine
10 line connection identification time length 0 to 9999 (10ms) 5500
11 T.30 T1 timer (for reception) 0 to 9999 (10ms) 3500
13 T30.EOL timer 500 to 3000 (10ms) 1300
15 hooking detection time length 0 to 999 (10ms) 120
16 time to tentative response at time of fax/tel 0 to 9 sec 4
switch-over
17 pseudo RBT signal pattern ON length 0 to 999 (10ms) 100
18 pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999 (10ms) 0
(short)
19 pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999 (10ms) 200
(long)
20 pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length 0 to 999 (10ms) 100
21 pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999 (10ms) 0
(short)
22 pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999 (10ms) 200
(long)
24 fax/tel switch-over pseudo RBT transmission 0 to 20 dBm 20
level
25 answer telephone CNG motor time length 0 to 999 sec 60
27 V.21 low-speed flag preamble detection time 1 to 99 (10ms) 3
length
28 menu selection screen display time length 1 to 60 sec 3

[No. 02. 03, 04]

Use it to set conditions for RTN signal transmission. If an error occurs often when the
RTN signal is transmitted at time of reception, increase the parameters to loosen the RTN
signal transmission conditions.
The following error codes are associated with the transmission of the RTN
signal at time of reception:
Memo ##104, ##107, ##114, ##201
The RTN signal transmission condition (1) is the ratio of the number of er-
ror lines in relation to the total number of lines per page of reception im-
ages.
The RTN signal transmission condition (2) is the reference value*2 for burst
errors*1.
The RTN signal transmission condition (3) is the number of errors not
reaching the reference value for burst errors.
*1: transmission errors spanning several lines.
*2: If set to ‘15’, a transmission error spanning 5 consecutive lines is
identified as a burst error.
If any of these conditions is detected while an image signal is being revised,
the RTN signal will be transmitted after receiving the procedure signal from
the transmitting machine. A higher parameter will make the transmission of
the RTN signal more difficult.
[No. 05]
Use it to set the length of item (pause) automatically put between the access code an the
ID code when a number is dialed on an NCC (new common carrier) line.
[No. 06]
Use it to set the length of time (pause) automatically put between the ID code and the
telephone number of the other party when a number is dialed on an NCC (new common car-
rier) line.
[No. 09]
Use it to set the number of TSI comparison digits (last XX digits) for a telephone number
cross check.
[No. 10]
Use it to set the length of time for line connection identification. If an error occurs often
because of the line condition at time of a communication, increase the parameter.

The line condition detection time length refers to the length between when
the dial signal is transmitted and when the line condition is cut in relation to
Memo the transmitting side, while it is the length between when the DIS signal is
transmitted and when the line is cut in relation to the receiving side.
[No. 11]
The setting of the T1 timer varies from country to country (PTT). The T1 timer is vari-
able.
[No. 13]
If the length of data for a single line is too long (e.g., computer fax), increase the 1-line
transmission time for possible reception to prevent a reception error.
[No. 15]
Use it to set the hooking detection time.
[No. 16]
Use it to set the time length between when the line is acquired and when the pseudo RBT
is transmitted when making a fax/tel switch-over.
[No. 17, 18, 19]

Use it to set a pattern of the pseudo RBT signal transmitted when making a fax/tel switch-
over.
[NO. 20, 21, 22]

Use it to set the pattern of the pseudo CI signal transmitted when making a fax/tel switch-
over.
[No. 24]
Use it to set the pseudo RBT transmission level used when making a fax/tel switch-over.
[No. 25]
Use it to set the length of time during which the absence of sound on the line, 2nd NSS
signal, or CNG signal transmitted by the other party is monitored after the answering phone
acquires the telephone line when answering machine mode is selected.
[No. 27]
Use it to change the detection evaluation time. (Command analysis is started when the
V.21 low-speed command preamble is detected continuously for a specific period of time.)
[No. 28]
Use it to set the length of time during which the Menu Select screen is indicated on the
LCD.

3.7 SPECIAL Setting (#4A SPECIAL)
Do not change the setting; otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
3.8 NCU Setting (#4B NCU)
The settings of this item are collectively set in relation to the setting of #5
TYPE so that all values will comply with the communications standards of
a specific country/region.
3.9 ISDN Setting (#4C ISDN)

Not used.
3.10 Country/Region of Installation (#5 TYPE)

When a country/region is selected for the indicated list, the data under #4 NCU will be set
to suit the communication standards of the county/region.
Be sure not to select a different country/region from the country/region of

installation.

3.11 Setting the Original Reading Functions (#6 SCANNER)

Item Description
1.Bit SW Do not change the setting; otherwise, the read image quality can be lost.
2. SLICE
3. GAMMA
4. Numeric
5. LUT 1 fno
6. LUT 2 adj
7. CCD partially hanged
8. MODEL not used
7. CCD Settings
No. Item Unit of adjustment
0 to 18 Do not change. -
*1
19 shading position adjustment 1 unit = 0.1 mm
21 left/right edge read start position adjustment 1 unit = 0.03 mm
(book mode)
23 leading edge read start position adjustment 1 unit = 0.1 mm
(book mode)
24 leading edge read start position 1 unit = 0.1 mm
(ADF mode)
25 trailing edge read end position adjustment 1 unit = 0.1 mm
(ADF mode)
26 to 33 Do not change. -
34 original feed speed adjustment 1 unit = approx. 0.5 mm
(ADF mode)
*1: Make adjustments only When white lines occur. (See 3.1.12 of Chapter 7.)
The factory settings of these adjustments differ from machine to machine. For instructions
on adjustment, see 1.2.4 of Chapter 7 or 1.3.4 of Chapter 7.

3.12 Setting the Printer Parameters (#7 PRINTER)

3.12.1 #1 SSSW Setting
#7 PRINTER-#1 SSSW-SW06 (reduction setting)

0 reduction at time of image divi- prohibit do not prohibit 0
sion
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[bit 0]
Use it to specify whether or not to reduce the received image of an extra-long original if it
can be printed in divisions after reducing to the maximum reduction ratio (70%).
prohibit:
select it to divide and print on the next page (Direct).
For instance, if an extra-length original as long as 2.5 A4R original is received, it will be
divided into 3 A4R sheets for printing; the image will be in Direct.
do not prohibit:
select it to print the image by reducing it to fit a single page (in divided print mode).
For instance, if an extra-length original as long as 2.5 A4R originals is received, it will
be reduced to 70% to print on 2 A4R sheets.

3.12.2 #2 NUMERIC Param. Setting
Do not change the setting; otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
3.12.3 #3 PRINT COUNT

Use it to indicate the number of prints.
3.12.4 #4 PRINT RESET

Use it to reset the printer; or, use it to clear service error ‘E000’.
3.12.5 #5 MLT CLEANING

Not used.
3.13 PDL (#8 PDL)

Not used.

3.14 Counter (#9 COUNTER)

3.14.1 Counter
The machine is equipped with various counters, whose readings may be used to obtain an
idea of when to replace specific parts.
The COUNTER items are as follows:

Level 1 item Level 2 item Level 3 item Description
COUNTER
TOTAL (total-orientated counter)
SERVICE1 service-use total counter 1
SERVICE2 service-use total counter 2
TTL total counter
COPY total copy counter
PDL-PRT print counter
FAX-PRT fax reception print counter
RPT-PRT report print counter
SCAN scan counter
PICK-UP (pickup-related counter)*1

C1 cassette pickup counter
C2 not used
C3 not used
C4 not used
MF manual feed tray pickup counter
FEEDER (ADF-related counter)

FEED ADF pickup counter
JAM (jam counter)

TTL machine total jam counter
FEEDER ADF jam counter
SORTER not used
MF manual feed tray jam counter
C1 cassette jam counter
C2 not used
C3 not used
C4 not used
MISC not used
*1: Not incremented at time of printing from the PC.

3.14.2 Clearing the Counter Readings

Start service mode, and select [#11 CLEAR]; then, press the OK key. Thereafter, select
[COUNTER], and press the OK key to clear all counter readings.
Generating a Counter Report

Start service mode, and select [#10 REPORT]; then, press the OK key.
Memo Thereafter, select [COUNTER REPORT], and press the OK key to obtain a
counter report.
3.15 Generating a Report (#10 REPORT)

The following is a list of the reports that may be generated, showing particulars of each:
Item Description
SERVICE&SYSTEM service data list, system dump print list
SERVICE DATA service mode #1 through #7, #13; start date
SYSTEM DUMP number of communications, number of receptions, number of re-
cording sheets, number of errors
KEY HISTORY REPORT 1800 most recent key presses
BCH LOG REPORT not used
COUNTER REPORT counter readings
PRINT SPEC REPORT TYPE setting, printing speed, memory size, ROM indication, ad-
justment data
3.16 Downloading (#11 DOWNLOAD)

Not used.

3.17 Clearing (#12 CLEAR)
Item Level 2 item Description

TEL & USER Use it to clear all areas under user registration/setting.
DATA Use it to clear the tel registration data* and user data.
*
One-touch dial, speed dial, and group dial numbers.
USER DATA Use it to clear user data. SSSW and TEL registration data are not
cleared.
SERVICE SW Use it to clear the settings under SSSW. The user data is not
cleared.
SERVICE DATA Use it to clear the counters (numerator), date, and start data form
the system dump list.
REPORT ACTIVITY Use it to clear the contents of the communications control report.
JAM not used.
ERR not used.
ALARM not used.
COUNTER Use it clear the counter data.
CARD not used.
ERR not used.
ALL Use it to clear all settings/registration data excluding the counter
readings (denominator, numerator) from the system dump list
and #5.
3.18 ROM Indication (#13 ROM)

The following is a list of the items/particulars for ROM indication mode:
Item Description
MAIN Use it to indicate the version of the ROM on the image processor PCB.
MAIN2 Use it to indicate the version of the CPU on the image processor PCB.
ECONT Use it to indicate the version of the ROM on the DC controller PCB.
PDL Use it to indicate the version of the ROM on the printer controller PCB.
3.19 Resetting the Contact Sensor Position (#14 CS SET)

Not used.

3.20 Service Mode Default Setting

TYPE EUROPE U.K. SWEDEN SWISS AUSTRIA DENMARK NORWAY
#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2 MENU
05: OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
06: DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL
07: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz

TYPE HOLLAND BELGUIM AUSTRALIA FINLAND N.Z. ITALY SPAIN

#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010001 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000010 00000010 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000010 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2 MENU
07: 10 6 10 10 10 10 10
10: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz

TYPE PORTUGAL IRELAND HONG KONG MALAYSIA HUNGARY SAF KOREA

#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 10000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000010 00000010 00000000 00000000 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000010
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000
SW26 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2 MENU
07: 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
10: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz

TYPE CHINA GERMAN FRANCE SINGAPORE CZECH SLOVENIA CANADA

#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 10000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10010000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000010 00000010 00000000 00000010 00000010 00000001
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000010
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2 MENU
07: 13 10 10 10 10 10 10
10: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz

TYPE ASIA POLAND EUROPE2

#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2 MENU
05: OFF OFF OFF
06: DIAL DIAL DIAL
07: 10 10 10
10: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz

TYPE EUROPE U.K. SWEDEN SWISS AUSTRIA DENMARK NORWAY

#3
NUMERIC
Param
02: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
03: 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
04: 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
05: 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
06: 4 1 4 4 4 4 4
09: 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10: 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500
11: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
13: 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300
15: 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
16: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17: 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
18: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19: 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
20: 100 40 100 100 100 100 30
21: 0 20 0 0 0 0 30
22: 400 200 400 400 400 400 400
24: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
25: 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
27: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
#5 TYPE EUROPE U.K. SWEDEN SWISS AUSTRIA DENMARK NORWAY

TYPE HOLLAND BELGUIM AUSTRALIA FINLAND N.Z. ITALY SPAIN

#3
NUMERIC
Param
02: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
03: 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
04: 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
05: 4 4 4 4 4 4 15
06: 4 4 4 4 4 4 3
09: 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10: 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500
11: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
13: 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300
15: 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
16: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17: 100 100 100 100 40 100 100
18: 0 0 0 0 20 0 0
19: 400 400 400 400 200 400 400
20: 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
21: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
22: 400 300 400 400 400 400 400
24: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
25: 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
27: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
#5 TYPE HOLLAND BELGUIM AUSTRALIA FINLAND N.Z. ITALY SPAIN

TYPE PORTUGAL IRELAND HONG KONG MALAYSIA HUNGARY SAF KOREA

#3
NUMERIC
Param
02: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
03: 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
04: 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
05: 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
06: 4 4 1 4 4 4 4
09: 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10: 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 3500 5500
11: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
13: 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1310
15: 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
16: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17: 100 100 40 100 100 100 100
18: 0 0 20 0 0 0 0
19: 400 400 200 400 400 400 400
20: 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
21: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
22: 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
24: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
25: 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
27: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
#5 TYPE PORTUGAL IRELAND HONG KONG MALAYSIA HUNGARY SAF KOREA

TYPE CHINA GERMAN FRANCE SINGAPORE CZECH SLOVENIA CANADA

#3
NUMERIC
Param
02: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
03: 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
04: 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
05: 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
06: 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
09: 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10: 4500 9000 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500
11: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
13: 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300
15: 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
16: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17: 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
18: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19: 400 400 400 400 400 400 200
20: 100 100 150 100 100 100 100
21: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
22: 400 400 300 400 400 400 200
24: 10 10 10 10 10 10 20
25: 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
27: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
#5 TYPE CHINA GERMAN FRANCE SINGAPORE CZECH SLOVENIA CANADA

TYPE ASIA POLAND EUROPE2

#3
NUMERIC
Param
02: 10 10 10
03: 15 15 15
04: 12 12 12
05: 4 4 4
06: 4 4 4
09: 6 6 6
10: 5500 5500 5500
11: 3500 3500 3500
13: 1300 1300 1300
15: 120 120 120
16: 2 2 2
17: 100 100 100
18: 0 0 0
19: 400 400 400
20: 100 100 100
21: 0 0 0
22: 400 400 400
24: 10 10 10
25: 60 60 60
27: 0 0 0
28: 3 3 3
#5 TYPE ASIA POLAND EUROPE2

3.21 Test Mode (TEST MODE)

3.21.1 Outline
When using test mode, be sure to execute items according to the menu indicated on the
display. The menu items in test mode are grouped into 7 blocks.
1. D-RAM Test (1: D-RAM)

Use it to be sure that data is properly written to and read from the D-RAM.
2. CCD Test (2: CCD TEST)

Use it to execute auto adjustment (contact sensor LED intensity or original read position)
or to initialize the CCD read position parameter.
3. PRINT Test (3: PRINT)

Use it to generate a test pattern for service.
4. MODEM NCU Test (4: MODEM NCU)

Use it to execute a relay operation test or modem DTMF and total signal transmission/
reception tests.
5. AGING Test (5: AGING TEST)

Not used.
6. FACULTY Test (6: FACULTY TEST)

Use it to check the operation of microswitches, sensors, speakers, and ADF.
7. BOOK Test (8: BOOK TEST)

Use it to turn on the contact sensor or to initialize the book reading position parameter.

3.21.2 List of Test Mode Items

To use test mode, press the Additional Functions key and # key; then, select ‘SERVICE
MODE’ and select ‘TEST MODE’ using the Left or Right Arrow key, and press the OK key.
To end test mode, press the Stop key and then the Additional Functions key.
TEST MODE [1] - [6], [8]

E111 : ###-##-##
1: D-RAM 1: D-RAM 6656K

[1] - - - [4] ******
1: D-RAM 6656K
******
1-3: IRAM TEST (not used)
OPT MEM -- -- (not used)

NO OPTION MEMORY
2: CCD TEST
[1] - - - [8]
3: PRINT 3: PRINT (disabled)

[0] - - - [9] , [*] , [#] 3-0: AMI PATERN
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-1: WHITE
3: PRINT
3-2: BLACK
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-3: STRIPES
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-4: CHECKERS
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-5: CHECKERS-2
3: PRINT
3-6: ENDURANCE
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-7: BLACK/WHITE
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-8: BIAS
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-9: CHECKERS-3
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-*: PRINTING AREA
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-#: CRG TEST
F02-321-01

4: MODEM 4-1. RELAY 1 RELAY 1 100000

NCU RELAY [0] - - - [5] 1-0: CML ON
[1] - - - [8] [1] - - - [2]
RELAY 1 010000
1-1: P ON
RELAY 1 001000
1-2: S ON
RELAY 1 000100
1-3: H ON
RELAY 1 000010
1-4: D ON
RELAY 1 000001
1-5: R ON
RELAY 2 RELAY 2 000000000010

[0] - - - [9], 2-0: IPSEL2 ON
[*],[#]
RELAY 2 100000000000
2-1: NZ ON
RELAY 2 010000000000
2-2: CI1 ON
RELAY 2 001000000000
2-3: CI2 ON
RELAY 2 000100000000
2-4: AST ON
RELAY 2 000010000000
2-5: C1 ON
RELAY 2 000001000000
2-6: C2 ON
RELAY 2 000000100000
2-7: NOR ON
RELAY 2 000000010000
2-8: DCSEL ON
RELAY 2 000000001000
2-9: DCL1M ON
RELAY 2 000000000100
2-*: IPSEL1 ON
RELAY 2 000000000001
2-#: IPSEL3 ON
F02-321-02

4-2: FREQ 4-2: FREQ

[1] - - - [7] 462 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1100 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1300 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1500 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1650 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1850 Hz
4-2: FREQ
2100 Hz
4-4: G3 Tx 4-4: G3 Tx
[0] - - - [8] 300 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
2400 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
4800 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
7200 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
9600 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
TC7200 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
TC9600 bps
F02-321-03

4-4: G3 Tx
12000 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
14400 bps
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST 4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

, 0:
[*] ,
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
1:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

2:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

3:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

4:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

5:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

6:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

7:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

8:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

9:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

#:
F02-321-04

4-6. TONE Rx 000
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST (not used)

0 --- 5 UP-DOWN
5: AGING TEST (not used)
F02-321-05

6: FACULTY TEST 6-1: G3 4800 bps Tx

[1] - - - [9], [#] 4800 bps
6-2: REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION SW OFF
6-3: SENSOR DS of DES of DOC A4
[1]---[8] CRG on DCVS on
HPS on RES of BCVS of
NDFS of DLS0 on DLS1 on
CT1 on A4 CT2 of
CT3 of CT4 of
MLT on A4 TN on
RS of JAM of
BSCT of BDOC [NONE]
BDSC3-0 [on on on on]
Panel1
NCR Sts NCR None
6-4: ADF
6-5: STAMP not used

[1] - - - [2]
6-6: SPEAKER 6-6: SPEAKER

FREQ : [1] VOL : [2] FREQ TEST
6-6:SPEAKER
VOL [ ]:MIN [#]:MAX
6-7: OPERATION PANEL
6-9: LINE DETECT C1=OFF 0 Hz
[1] - - - [3] HOOK=ON/ON FC=OFF (not used)
CNG DETECT (not used)

CNG=OFF OFF
CNG DETECT
CNG=OFF OFF
6- : ESS TEST
F02-321-06

8: BOOK TEST 8-1: BOOK FEED TEST

[1] - - - [8] P.0000/0000
8-2: BOOK ADJ

P.0000/0000
8-3: CS POS ADJ ADF
8-4:
8-5: BOOK TEST
8-6: BOOK TEST
8-7: CS POTION INIT
8-8: SHADING REF D.SAMPLE
F02-321-07

3.21.3 D-RAM Test (1: D-RAM)

Press ‘1’ on the keypad on the Test Mode menu to select D-RAM (SDRAM) Test mode.
Thereafter, press ‘1’ or ‘2’ on the keypad to execute the following:
‘1’ on Keypad
Press it to execute a data write/read check for the entire area of the D-RAM (SDRAM). If
an error occurs during the check, the machine will stop the check and indicate an error on
the LCD.
‘2’ on Keypad
Press it to execute a data read check for the entire area of the D-RAM (SDRAM). If an
error occurs during the check, the machine will stop the check and indicate an error on the
LCD.
Indicated only when image data exists in the D-RAM.

PIX RECORD CLEAR ? OK: press the OK key to clear the image data in the D-RAM.
OK<OK>, NO<STOP> NO: press the Stop key to return to TEST MODE.
Press the OK key.
1:D-RAM 6656K
[1] - - - [4]
Press '1' on the keypad. Normal end
1:D-RAM 6656K 1:D-RAM 6656K

*******...... complete (no error)
6656K : indicates the total size of memory

of the D-RAM (in bytes).
* : indicates the memory size for
data write operation.
. : indicates the memory size for Error indication
data read operation.
WRT= 33CC RD= 33EC
ADR= BF840201
Press '2' on the keypad.
1:D-RAM 6656K Press the Start WRT : data written.
...... key to resume. RD : data read.
ADR : address.
6656K : indicates the total memory of Error end
the D-RAM (in bytes).
. : indicates the memory size for data 1:D-RAM 6656K
write operation. complete (error)
F02-321-08

3.21.4 CCD Test (2: CCD TEST)

A press on ‘2’ on the keypad on the Test Mode menu will select CCD Test mode. Press
‘3’, ‘7’, or ‘8’ on the keypad to execute the following:
‘3’ on Keypad
Press it to execute original read position auto adjustment (if equipped with ADF) so as to
adjust the contact sensor position used for reading with the ADF in use automatically. (See
1.3.4.2 of Chapter 7.
‘7’ on Keypad
Press it to initialize the contact sensor parameters, including those that are not initialized
by ‘all clear’ in service mode.
‘8’ on Keypad
Press it to execute contact sensor LED intensity auto adjustment so that the contact sensor
output correction is made and contact sensor parameters are automatically set. (See 1.2.4.1
of Chapter 7.)

3.21.5 PRINT Test (3: PRINT)

Press ‘3’ on the keypad from the Test Mode menu to select Print Test mode. A press on ‘2’
or ‘6’ on the keypad during the test will generate any of the following 2 types of test pat-
terns. Do not use the others, as they are especially designed for use by the factory and R&D.
‘2’ on Keypad
3-2: Press it to generate BLACK, which is a solid black print.
‘6’ on Keypad
3-6: Press it to generate ENDURANCE, which is a black band.
To stop test printing, press the Stop key.
Check to make sure that the print Check it to make sure that the
pattern is free of contraction, print pattern is free of white
elongation, dirt, or black lines. line or uneven density.
F02-321-09

3.21.6 MODEM NCU Test (4: MODEM NCU)

Use it to execute a transmission test for MODEM NCU. In a modem test, you can make
sure that the signals from the modem are transmitted normally by listening to the sound of
signals from the speaker.
You can also use it to make sure that the received total signal and DTMF signal are cor-
rectly detected by the modem. To end the test, press the Stop key.
Type Description
Relay test Use it to turn on/off a selected relay to execute a switch-over test.
G3 signal transmission test Use it to generate the G3 signal coming from the modem using
the telephone line terminal and the speaker.
DTMF signal reception test Use it to generate the DTMF signal coming from the modem us-
ing the telephone line terminal and the speaker.
Total signal reception test Use it to monitor a specific frequency and the DTMF signal re-
ceived from the telephone line terminal by causing them to be
indicated on the LCD (i.e., the presence/absence as detected). The
reception signal is generated by the speaker.
3.21.6.1 Relay Test

Press ‘1’ on the keypad on the Modem NCU Test menu to select relay test mode. Use the
keypad to operate the various relays of the NCU.
The LCD is turned on or off in relation to the transmission of the relay op-
eration signal as is operated on the keypad; for this reason, you cannot use
the LCD to check a fault on a single relay.
RELAY 1 010000 1 : relay ON

1-1 : P ON 2 : relay OFF
0 1 0 0 0 0
Relay CML P S H D R
Keypad 0 1 2 3 4 5
F02-321-10

3.21.6.2 Frequency Test

A press on ‘2’ on the keypad from the MODEM NCU Test menu selects the frequency
test. In this test, signals of the following frequencies from the modem are transmitted using
the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To select a different frequency, use the keypad.
Keypad Frequency
1 462 Hz
2 1100 Hz
3 1300 Hz
4 1500 Hz
5 1650 Hz
6 1850 Hz
7 2100 Hz
The frequency and the output level of individual frequencies are in keeping
with the output level set in service mode.
Memo
3.21.6.3 G3 Signal Transmission Test

A press on ‘4’ on the keypad from the MODEM NCU Test menu selects the G3 signal
transmission test. In this test, the following G3 signals from the modem are transmitted us-
ing the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To select a different transmission speed, use
the keypad.
Keypad Transmission speed

0 300 bps
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
3 7200 bps
4 9600 bps
5 TC7200 bps
6 TC9600 bps
7 12000 bps
8 14400 bps
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in
service mode.
Memo

3.21.6.4 DTMF Signal Transmission Test

A press on ‘5’ on the MODEM NCU Test menu selects the DTMF signal transmission
test. In the test, the following DTMF signals from the modem are transmitted using the tele-
phone line terminal and the speaker. The number pressed on the keypad selects a specific
DTMF signal.
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in
service mode.
Memo
3.21.6.5 Tonal/DTMF Signal Reception Test

A press on ‘6’ on the keypad from the MODEM NCU Test menu selects the tonal signal/
DTMF signal reception 0 test. In this signal, the tonal signal/DTMF signal received from the
telephone line terminal can be checked to find out if it was detected by the modem.
Tonal signal reception test
4-6 : TONE Rx 000
0 0 0
changes from '0' to '1' in response to detection of a signal of 462 ± 25 Hz.
DTMF signal reception test
4-6 : TONE Rx 000

1234567890
The received DTMF signals are indicated
starting from the right using the 2nd
character of the display.
F02-321-11

3.21.7 AGING Test (5: AGING TEST)

Not used.
3.21.8 FACULTY (function) Test (6: FACULTY TEST)

A press on ‘6’ on the keypad from the TEST MODE menu selects the FACULTY test. A
press on the keypad (1 through 7, 9, #) during the test will bring up the following menu:
Keypad Item Description

1 G3 Signal Transmission Test Transmits a G3 signal at 4800 bps to the telephone
line and the speaker.
2 not used
3 Sensor Test Executes an operation test on a specific sensor.
4 ADF Test Executes an operation test on the ADF.
5 not used
6 Speaker Test Executes an operation test on the speaker.
7 Control Panel Test Executes an operation test on the LCD/LED/control
panel keys.
9 Live Connection Reception Test Executes an operation test on the signal sensor on
the NCU board and the frequency counter.
# ESS Test Executes an operation test on the ESS function.
G3 Signal Transmission Test (6-1: G3 4800 bps Tx)

A press on ‘1’ on the keypad on the FACULTY TEST menu selects the G3 transmission
test. In this test, a G3 signal is transmitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker
at 4800 bps.
Sensor Test (6-3: SENSOR)

This mode is used to check the state of a specific sensor of the machine on the LCD. A
press on ‘3’ on the keypad from the FACULTY TEST menu selects the sensor test. The LCD
indication changes as the sensor goes ON and OFF.

6-3:SENOR
[1] - - - [7]
DS of DES of DOC A4
CRG on DCVS on
DS: original sensor*1 (PS6); 'on' if present, 'of' if absent.

DES: registration sensor*1 (PS7); 'on' if present, 'of' if absent.
DOC: not used.
CRG: toner cartridge sensor: 'on/of' toner cartridge present/absent.
DCVS: reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1); 'on' reader unit in position,
'of' reader unit slid to left.
*1: indicates the state of a specific sensor of the ADF.

HPS on RES on BCVS of
HPS: contact sensor home position sensor (PS1):

'on' contact sensor in home position,
'of' contact sensor not in home position.
RES: not used.
BCVS: ADF (copyboard cover) open/close sensor (PS2); 'on' cover open, 'of' cover closed.
NDFS: not used.
DLS0: not used.
DLS1: not used.

CT1 on A4 CT2 of
CT3 on CT4 of
CT1: cassette paper sensor (P103); 'on' paper present, 'of' paper absent.
CT2: not used.
CT3: not used.
CT4: not used.

MLT on A4 TN on
RS of JAM of
MLT:manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4); 'on' paper present, 'of' paper absent.
TN: toner sensor; 'on' toner present, 'of' toner absent.
RS: not used.
JAM: jam status; 'on' jam detected, 'of' jam not detected.
BSCT on BDOC[A3 ]
BDSS3-0 [of of of of]
Not used.
F02-321-12

BSCT on BDOC[A3 ]
BDSS3-0 [of of of of]
Not used.
Panel1
Not used.
NCR Sts : NCR None
Not used.
F02-321-13
ADF Test (6-4: ADF)

Use it to check the operation of the ADF.
Press ‘4’ on the keypad while the FACULTY TEST menu is indicated to select ADF test.
Place an original in the original placement area, and press the Start key so that the original
will be moved at a specific speed.
Select this item, press 10 originals in the ADF, and press ‘8’ on the keypad to execute reg-
istration arch auto adjustment (only if equipped with ADF functions). (See 1.3.4 of Chapter
7.)
Speaker test (6-6: SPEAKER)
Use it to check the operation of the speaker.
Press ‘6’ on the keyboard while the FACULTY TEST menu is indicated to select speaker
test. In the test, tonal signal sounds of between 200 Hz to 5 kHz at 100-Hz intervals are gen-
erated white changing the volume. Check to see if the speaker generates these signals.
6-6: SPEAKER
FREQ:[1] VOL:[2]
Press '1' on the keypad. Press '2' on keypad.

6-6: SPEAKER 6-6: SPEAKER
FREQ TEST VOL[*] :MIN [#]:MAX
Press the Start key Adjust the volume

to change the of the signals; at *,
transmission frequency. min.; at #, max.;
may be changed in
steps by pressing the
Start key.
F02-321-14

Control Panel Test (6-7: OPERATION PANEL)

This test is used to check the operation of the control panel.
A press on ‘7’ on the keypad from the control panel selects the OPERATION PANEL Test
menu, enabling the following tests:
• LCD Test
A press on the Start key under OPERATION PANEL test will start LCD test, in which
the screen will be filled with the character H; another press will cause the screen to turn
totally black.
• LED Lamp Test
A press on the Start key after the LCD test selects the LED lamp test, turning all lamps
in the control panel to go ON.
• Control Key Test
A press on the Start key after the LED lamp selects control key test 1. Press the key in-
dicated on the LCD; if it goes out, the operation is normal.
When all characters have gone out, control key test 2 (if equipped with fax functions) is
started. As in the case of operation key test 1, press the key indicated on the LCD; the op-
eration is correct if it goes out.
Key Correspondence for Control Key Test 1 (if not equipped with fax functions)
[E] [A] [C]
OK
[J] [H] [D] Same as LCD indications.

[F] [I] [G] [B]
F02-321-15

Key Correspondence for Control Key Test 1 (if equipped with fax functions)
[R] [N] [H] [I ] [B] [D] [G] [F]
Function
Fax Monitor R
Redial / Pause
ABC DEF
Memory D.T.
Reference
Coded Dial
Report Tone/+ GHI JKL MNO

Directory
OK
Delayed Space
Transmission Receive Mode PQRS TUV WXYZ
Book Sending Delete

Fax Resolution
Clear
[A] [Q] [O] [P] [L] [E]

[J] [M] [K] [C] Same as LCD indications.
F02-321-16
Key Correspondence for Control Key Test 2 (if equipped with fax functions)
[9] [8] [7]
Function
[1]
Fax Monitor R
[2] Redial / Pause

Memory D.T.
Reference
Coded Dial
[3]
Report Tone/+
Directory
[4]
Delayed Space
Transmission Receive Mode
[5]
Book Sending Delete
Fax Resolution
[6]
Clear
[a] [b] [c]

F02-321-17

The following is the flow of work for the control panel test:
6 - 7 : OPE RA T I ON PANE L
LCD test Press the Start key.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Character H is indicated.
Press the Start key.
The screen turns totally black.
The Start key is pressed.
6 - 7 : OPE RA T I ON PANE L
L ED T E S T All LED lamps go ON.
LED lamp test Press the Start key.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # ABCDEFG A press on the key causes its

H I J K LMNOPQR corresponding character to go out.
Control
key test (1)
1 2 34 5 6 7 89 a b c A press on a 1-touch dial key causes

its corresponding character to go out.
Control key test (2)
After all characters are gone, press the Stop key to end the test.
F02-321-18

Line Connection Reception Test (6-9: LINE DETECT)

A press on ‘9’ on the keypad from the FACULTY TEST menu selects the LINE DETECT
test. On Test Menu 1, you can check C1, FC, state of hooking of the eternal telephone, and
the detection of signals by the NCU package.
Test Menu 1
A press on ‘1’ on the keypad from the LINE DETECT menu selects test menu 1. In this
test, the LCD indication changes from ‘OFF’ to ‘ON’ when C1, FC, or off-set of the external
telephone is detected in relation to the telephone line.
Test Menu 3
A press on ‘3’ on the keypad from the LINE DETECT menu selects test menu 3. In this
test, the LCD indication changes from ‘OFF’ to ‘ON’ when CNG is detected in relation to
the telephone terminal.
ESS Test (6-#: ESS TEST)

A press on the # key from the FACULTY TEST menu executes the ESS (Energy Save
Stanby: hereafter, ESS) test. In the course of execution, the test causes the machine to be in
ESS mode, causing all LEDs except the Energy Saver key in the control panel to go OFF.
The machine ends ESS mode for the following:
• The Energy Saver key is pressed.
• Print data arrives from the PC.
• A fax arrives.*1
• Off-hook set is detected.*1
• The report output time arrives.*1
• The timer call time arrives.*1
3.21.9 BOOK Read Test (8: BOOK TEST)

A press on ‘8’ on the keypad from the TEST MODE menu selects the BOOK test. A press
on ‘4’ or ‘6’ on the keypad during this test initializes the corresponding parameter as de-
scribed below:
‘4’ on the Keypad

The book read position parameter (#6 SCANNER 7: CCD 21, 23) is initialized.
‘6’ on the Keypad

The BOOK read parameter (#6 SCANNER 7: CCD 18*1, 19, 21, 23) is initialized.
*1: The term “CCD18 setting” refers to the setting for original read position adjustment ex-
ecuted by a press on ‘3’ of the keypad under ‘CCD TEST’ of ‘TEST MODE’.

3.22 Service Report

3.22.1 Manually Generating Reports
The following reports may be generated manually in service mode:
Type of report Operation

SYSTEM (SERVICE) DATA LIST Select an item under [#10 REPORT] from the
SYSTEM DUMP LIST service mode menu, and press the OK key. Or,
KEY HISTORY REPORT press Function key and Report key in this order
COUNTER REPORT in service mode. Then select the list to output,
PRINT SPEC REPORT and press OK key.
T02-322-01
3.22.1.1 SYSTEM (SERVICE) DATA LIST

The following shows the service soft switch settings and the service parameter settings:
F02-322-01

3.22.1.2 SYSTEM DUMP LIST

The following shows a record of communications and error communications:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F02-322-02
*1: TX; total number of transmitted pages.

*2: Number of transmitted pages by original size.
*3: RX; total number of received pages.
*4: Number of received pages by original size.
*5: Number of transmitted/received pages by modem speed.
*6: Number of transmitted/received pages by mode (Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Ultra Fine).
*7: Number of transmitted/received pages by coding method.
*8: Number of transmissions/receptions by mode.
*9: Number of prints, total number of prints; number of pages read, total number of pages
read.
*10: Number of occurrences of specific error codes.
Guide to Indication
##000 1 7 3 0 0
Number of Number of Number of
##000 errors ##001 errors ##002 errors

The report indicates the most recent 3 communication errors:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F02-322-03
*1: Service error code.

*2: START TIME: date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY; telephone number sent by other party.
*4: MAKER CODE; manufacturer code.
*5: MACHINE CODE: code by model.
*6: Bit 1 through 48 of DIS, DCS, or DTC received.
*7: Bit 1 through 48 of DIS, DCS, or DTC transmitted.
*8: RX: received procedure signal.
TX: transmitted procedure signal.

3.22.1.3 KEY HISTORY REPORT

The report indicates the most recent 1800 key presses:
F02-322-04

3.22.1.4 COUNTER REPORT

The various counter readings are indicated (3.14.1 of Chapter 2):
02/01/2001 13:58 FAX 001
**************************
*** COUNTER REPORT
***
T0TAL
**************************
SERVICE1 = 15
SERVICE2 = 15
TTL = 15
COPY = 1
PDL-PRT = 0
FAX-PRT = 0
RPT-PRT = 10
SCAN = 1
PICK-UP
C1 = 15
C2 = 0
C3 = 0
C4 = 0
MF = 0
FEEDER
FEED = 0
JAM
TTL = 0
FEEDER = 0
SORTER = 0
MF = 0
C1 = 0
C2 = 0
C3 = 0
C4 = 0
MISC
WST-TNR = 15
F02-322-05

3.22.1.5 PRINT SPEC REPORT

The report indicates the TYPE settings, printing speed, memory size, ROM version, and
adjustment data.
02/01/2001 14:00 FAX 001
TYPE ----- EURO

LBP SPEED ----- 13SHEETS
TOTAL MEMORY ----- 6656K
MAIN ----- EURO-22-03
MAIN2 ----- WLD-03-01
ECONT ----- 0038
CAPT ----- 0005
READ ADJ PRM

18 : ----- 3551
21 : ----- 0025
23 : ----- 0010
24 : ----- 0045
25 : ----- 0258
34 : ----- 0050
35 : ----- 0130
F02-322-06
3.22.2 Automatically Generated Reports

The following reports are generated automatically:
Type of report Operation

Error TX report Enable automatic generation on the report set-
(w/ error code list, dump list) tings menu in user mode menu (i.e., use bits 0
and 1 of SW01 of service data #1 SSSW).
RX report Enable automatic generation on the report set-

(w/ error code list, dump list) tings menu in user mode menu (i.e., use bits 0
and 1 of SW01 of service data #1 SSSW).
T03-322-02

3.22.2.1 Error TX Report (for service)

A service error code list and an error dump list may be attached to the error TX report. To
do so, use service SSSW-SW01 in service mode.
If ‘attach’ is selected for ‘transmission image’ under ‘transmission result report’ of [RE-
PORT SETTING] in user mode, a part of the 1st page of the transmission image will be at-
tached when memory transmission is used.
02/08/2001 19:29 FAX 001
**************************
*** ERROR TX REPORT ***
**************************
TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED
TX/RX NO 0004
DESTINATION TEL # 12
DESTINATION ID
ST. TIME 02/08 19:28
TIME USE 01`31
PGS. 0
RESULT NG *1 ##0765
*2 START TIME 02/08 19:28
*3 OTHER PARTY 12
*4 MAKER CODE 10001000
*5 MACHINE CODE 10011100 00000000
*6 Rx : (bit 1) 00000000 01110011 10011101 00100010 00000000 00000000 00000000 (bit56)

*7 Tx : (bit 1) 00000000 01100000 00011111 00100010 00000000 00000000 00000000 (bit56)
*8 Rx : NSS CSI DIS CFR PPR

Tx : NSS DCS PIX PPS-EOP PIX PPS-EOP PPS-EOP PPS-EOP DCN
F02-322-07

*2: START TIME; date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY; telephone number sent from other party.
*4: MAKER CODE; manufacture code.
*5: MACHINE CODE; model code.
*6: Bits 1 through 48 of received DIS, DCS, or DTC.

3.22.2.2 RX Report (for service)

A service error code list and an error dump list may be attached to the RX report in re-
sponse to an error reception. To attach, use SSSW-SW01 in service mode.
02/08/2001 19:33 FAX 001
**************************
*** RX REPORT
***
**************************
INCOMPLETE RECEPTION
TX/RX NO 5001
DESTINATION TEL #
DESTINATION ID
ST. TIME 02/08 19:30
TIME USE 03`02
PGS. 1
RESULT NG *1 ##0793
*2 START TIME 02/08 19:30

*3 OTHER PARTY
*4 MAKER CODE 10001000
*5 MACHINE CODE 10011100 00000000
*6 Rx : (bit 1) 00000000 01100110 00011111 00100010 00000000 00000000 00000000 (bit56)

*7 Tx : (bit 1) 00000000 01110111 00010001 00100011 00000001 10101011 11000001(bit56)
(bit57) 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 (bit96)
*8 Rx : NSS TSI DCS PIX

Tx : NSF DIS CFR
F02-322-08

*2: START TIME; date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY; telephone number sent from other party.
*4: MAKER CODE; manufacture code.
*5: MACHINE CODE; model code.

CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION

1 Selecting the Site

The site must meet the following requirements; if possible, visit the user’s before the ma-
chine is delivered:
1. The site must offer a power outlet whose rating is as indicated 230 volts (±10%) and
which may be used exclusively for the machine.
2. The site temperature must be between 0° and 35°C (32° and 95°F) and between 35%
and 85% humidity. Avoid an area near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier, and re-
frigerator.
3. The site must not be near a source of fire, or must not be subject to dust or ammonium
gas. Also, avoid areas exposed to direct rays of the sun; if necessary, provide curtains.
4. The level of ozone generated by the machine while in use will not affect the health of
the human body. However, some individuals may find its odor unpleasant. Be sure to
ventilate the room well to provide a good working environment.
5. The machine will have to be at least 10cm/3.9" from any wall, offering enough space for
its use.
10cm
50cm 50cm
50cm
F03-101-01
6. The machine will have to be placed in a well-ventilated area of the room. Do not, how-
ever, place it near the inlet of air.

2 Unpacking and Installing the Machine

2.1 Before Starting
Go through the following before starting to install the machine:
If the machine is moved from a cold to a warm place for installation, con-
densation can develop in its pickup/feeding assembly, causing image faults.
To avoid the condensation, leave the machine unpacked for 1 hr or more so
that it will be fully used to the room temperature.
(The term condensation refers to the development of drops of water on a
mental surface when it is brought from a cold to warm place. This occurs as
a result of rapid cooling of vapor in the air.)
2.2 Installation Procedure

Install the machine in the following order; for details, see the appropriate sections that fol-
low; after installation, be sure to clean up the area around the machine:
1. unpacking
2. fitting the cartridge
3. putting paper in the cassette
4. putting paper in the manual feed tray
5. connecting the interface cable
6. connecting the modular cable (if equipped with fax functions)
7. connecting the power cord
8. fitting the delivery tray
9. checking the copy images
10. setting the printer functions
11. setting the fax functions (if equipped with fax functions)

2.3 Unpacking
Actions Checks/remarks
1) Unpack the machine, and take out the Check to see that none of the following is missing:
attachments. • cassette
• delivery tray
• cartridge
• power cord
• Quick Start Guide
• Reference Guide
• CD-ROM
• Warranty card
• EWS pamphlet (for PC1200s only)
• Modular cable (Specific country/region models
only.)
• Fax Guide (if eqquipped with fax functions)
2) Holding the grips on the left and right

of the machine, lift it out of the box.
3) Remove the packing material: plastic

sheets, securing members, and tape.
4) Remove the shipping screw.

5) While pulling on the reader unit slide
lever, slide out the reader unit to the
left.
6) Open the cartridge cover.
7) Store away the securing member re-

moved in step 4 in the shipping screw
slot.

2.4 Fitting the Cartridge
1) Unpack the cartridge, and take it out
without removing its wrappings.
2) Rock the cartridge left and right about 5
to 6 times to even out the toner inside.
3) Detach the tab and pull out the tape

slowly. When doing so, be sure to place
the cartridge on a level surface, and
hold it firmly in place. However, take
care not to push down on the photoposi-
tive drum through the shutter.

4) Fully insert the cartridge in the direc-
tion of the arrow as indicated.
5) Close the cartridge cover, and put back

the reader unit.

2.5 Putting Paper in the Cassette
1) Lift the paper cassette slightly, and pull
it out until it stops.
2) Put paper in the cassette, under the claw

must indicate what [1] and [2] are.
[1]
[1]
[2]
3) Slide in the cassette until it stops.

2.6 Putting Paper in the Manual Feed Tray
1) Open the manual feed tray.
2) Slid out the auxiliary tray.
3) Place the paper (with the side to be cop-

ied onto facing up).
4) Adjust the slide guide to suit the width

of the paper.

2.7 Connecting the Interface Cable
Actions Checks/Remarks
1) Connect the cable to the USB port if a
USB cable is to be used, or to the paral-
lel port if a parallel interface cable is to
be used. Be sure also to connect the
cable to the PC.
Use interface cables that

comply with specifications
of the machine.
USB cable specifications:
5 m or shorter.
Parallel interface cable
specifications: 3 m or
shorter (Compliant to
IEEE1284, for bi-direc-
tional communication)
2.8 Connecting the Modular Cable (if equipped with fax func-
tions)
1) Connect one end of the modular cable
to the terminal [L], and the other end to
the socket of the telephone.
If both telephone and fax are to be
used, connect the modular cable from
the telephone (or answering machine)
to the [telephone] terminal.

2.9 Connecting the Power Cord
1) Connect the power cord
2.10 Fitting the Delivery Tray

1) Mount the delivery tray.
2.11 Checking the Copy Images
1) Place an original on the copyboard
glass or in the ADF and select the cas-
sette or the manual feed tray as the
source of paper; then, check the copied
images.

2.12 Setting the Printer Functions
1) Install printer drivers, and perform test
printing from the PC to check the im-
ages.
Be sure that the PC envi-

ronment meets the require-
ments of the machine be-
fore installing the printer
drivers.
For details, refer to Quick
Start Guide.

2.13 Setting Fax Functions (if equipped with fax functions)

2.13.1 Setting the Date/Time (user mode)
1) Press the Additional Functions key.
2) Press the Left/Right Arrow key, to select
‘5. TIMER SETTING’.
4) Check to make sure that ‘1. DATE/
TIME SETTING’ is indicated and press
the OK key.
5) Enter the current date and time. Press
the Left/Right Arrow key to move the
cursor to the character to enter and enter
a number using the keypad.
6) Press the OK key so that the date/time
will be stored.

2.13.2 Setting the Dial Type
1) Press the Additional Functions key.
2) Press the Left/Right Arrow key to select
‘3. FAX SETTING’.
4) Check to see that ‘1. USER SETTING’
is indicated and press the OK key.
5) Check to see that ‘1. TEL LINE SET-
TING’ is indicated and press the OK
key.
6) Press the Left/Right key to select ‘2.
TEL LINE TYPE’.
8) Press the Left/Right key to select
‘TOUCH TONE’ or ‘ROTARY PULSE’.
9) Press the OK key so that the selected
line type is stored.
2.13.3 Executing Communications Testing
1) Press the Fax key in the control panel
so that the machine will be in fax
mode.
2) Try sending and receiving an original
and check the operation and the images.

3 When Relocating the Machine

If the machine must be moved by truck or other means of transportation, be sure to go
through the following:
1. If the machine is equipped with fax function and the move will take 2 hours or more, the
fax image data, if any, will be lost. Advise the user on this and, if necessary, print out the
image data.
2. Be sure no communication is under way with an external device.
3. Check that the contact sensor is in home position and disconnect the power cord.
4. Disconnect the interface cable and modular cable.
5. Remove the delivery tray.
6. Slide the reader unit to the left, and open the cartridge cover.
7. Take out the shipping screw that have been stored away inside the machine.
F03-301-01
8. Take out the cartridge from inside of the machine and put it in a protective bag or the
like to avoid direct rays of the sun.
9. Close the cartridge cover and put back the reader unit.
10. Fit the shipping screw you removed in step 7 and secure the contact sensor in place.
F03-301-02

11. Open the ADF (copyboard cover) and place A4 (LTR) sheet on the copyboard glass
then, close the ADF (copyboard cover).
12. Tape the machine’s covers in place so that it will not open in transit.
13. Pack the machine and start the relocation.
Take full care to avoid severe vibration during the relocation.

CHAPTER 4
OPERATION

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
1 Basic Operation
1.1 Reproduction Processes
1.1.1 Outline
The machine uses an indirect electrostatic method, and is constructed as shown in F04-
101-01:
Copyboard glass
Contact sensor
Image processing block

Cartridge
Laser scanner assembly Photosensitive drum
Developing
cylinder
Primary charging roller
Cleaning blade
Paper
Fixing assembly
Static eliminator
Transfer charging roller
Paper Vertical path roller
F04-101-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
The machine has a cartridge construction, in which the drum, toner housing, primary
charging assembly, developing cylinder, and cleaning blade are designed as a single entity
(items serving as the core of image formation).
It uses SURF as its fixing method, in which a fluorine-coated film is heated by a heater,
and paper is moved between the film and the fixing pressure roller (the image is fused by
the work of heat and pressure.)
The machine’s image formation processes are as follow:
Step 1 Primary charging (AC and negative DC)

Step 2 Laser exposure
Step 3 Development (AC and negative DC)
Step 4 Transfer (positive DC)
Step 5 Separation
Step 6 Fixing
Step 7 Drum cleaning
Static image formation block
Cartridge
1.Primary charging 2.Laser exposure
3.Development
7.Drum cleaning
4.Transfer Manual feed tray

Registration
Delivery 6.Fixing 5.Separation
Cassette
flow of paper
rotation of drum
F04-101-02
The machine’s sequence of operation is controlled by the CPU on the image processor
PCB and the CPU on the DC controller PCB. F04-101-03 shows the sequential flow, and
T04-101-01 provides descriptions of the periods involved. For a timing chart, see Appendix.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
Power ON
or
Reader unit in initial position
or End of printing
Return from ESS mode
If a print command is received
during last rotation
Wait Standby Initial rotation Print Last rotation
If continuous printing is selected
F04-101-03
Period Definition Purpose Remarks

WAIT From when the power The machine’s mechanical A check is made on the presence/
(wait) is turned on until and electrical states are absence of a cartridge and for paper
when the application checked. remaining inside the machine. The
of the primary charg- machine also shifts the WAIT state
ing AC bias is started when the reader unit is returned to the
and stopped. home position while power is on, or
after returning from ESS mode.
STBY After the end of The machine is ready for a If a shift is from last rotation of
(standby) WAIT, unit the Start print command. printing on LTR or larger, the fix-
key is pressed. ing heater is subjected to rest heat-
ing temperature control for 5 sec.
INTR After a press on the The machine starts up pro- The fixing heater is subjected to
(initial Start key, until the cess conditions and picks up temperature control (start-up tem-
rotation) leading edge is de- paper for printing. perature control, paper passage
tected by the paper temperature control); scanner ro-
leading edge sensor. tation speed adjustment and
ATVC control are executed.
PRINT From when the paper The DC controller PCB gen-
(print) leading edge sensor erates the BD0* signal, and
detects the leading the image processor PCB
edge of paper to 1.5 sends VD0* signal and VD0
sec after it detects the signal, thereby forming a la-
trailing edge of paper. tent image on the photosensi-
tive drum and turning it into
a toner image.
LSTR From when printing The drum surface is made After last rotation, the machine shifts
(last ends until the main free of potential and the to standby to wait for a print com-
rotation) motor stops. transfer charging roller is mand, in response to which it imme-
cleaned. diately shifts to initial rotation.
T04-101-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
1.2 Functional Construction

The machine may broadly be divided into the following 7 functional blocks:
<System Used for Communication

with External Devices>
Printer Controller PCB

<Image Reading/Processing System>
Modular Jack
PCB*1 Original
*1
NCU PCB
Contact sensor
Control panel Analog processor/BD PCB
Image processor PCB

<Laser Exposure System>
Laser driver/BD PCB Laser scanner

<Control System>
<Image Formation System>

Charg-
DC controller PCB ing
Drum cleaning Drum Development

<Fixing System>
Sepa- Trans-
Fixing ration fer
Delivery tray Feeding Manual feed tray
Cassette <Pickup/Feeding System>
*1 : If equipped with fax functions.
F04-102-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
1.3 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

1.3.1 Functional Block Diagram
Telephone line
Transmission
Reception
To power supply
Delivery
Modular sensor
Memb-
LCD Speaker
*2
PC Jack Fixing assembly Cartridge
rane PCB*2 PS3
J4030 J4020 J911/J912 J1051
Parallel I/F
USB I/F
J403 J402 J404 J7/J8 J107 J105/ J206 J205/J207/208/J209 PS102 PS103
J107/ Paper leading Cassette
Control panel Printer Controller NCU PCB*2 Power supply PCB edge sensor paper sensor
PCB PCB 2-Line/4-Line DC controller PCB
Switching
Key detection Communication conversion circuit regulator Fixing heater control block Laser control block
and LCD/LED Control Dial pulse FT101 FT901
drive generation High-voltage control block Horizontal sync signal control
USB serial circuit
LCD number notice J4 J902 J102 J902 Drive control block Scanner motor control
Off-hook
function function detection Sensor detection Cartridge detection mechanism
Serial Smoothing circuit
Line voltage Image processor PCB Toner level detection
communication
control conversion circuit interface block mechanism
J401 J701 J1/J2/J6 J103/104 J204/201
J315 J318 J319/J320/J321*2 J301/302 J303/304
Image processor PCB
Drive control block Sensor detection
Control panel control block Memory function
Image processing control block ESS control
Communication control block
Speaker control*2
J317 J310 J311*1 J316 J312 J309 J307 J314 J308
J3102 J3124
J501 M2 ADF*1 J801 J3120 J3123 FM1 SL1 SL2 SW1 PS4
Analog
Fan
Manual feed pickup

solenoid
Cassette pickup
Reader unit slide

detecting switch
Manual feed tray

paper sensor
Reader motor
solenoid
Original
Laser scanner
Laser driver/
processor sensor
BD PCB
motor driver
Main motor
PCB
PS6
J503 J502 J3112
driver
Registration
sensor
PS7 M4 M1
J504 J601 J3113
Sensor PCB Original
Scanner Main
Contact sensor ADF delivery motor motor
Contact
sensor
sensor
home position (copyboard cover)

sensor open/close
sensor PS8
J3114
PS1 PS2
ADF motor *1 : If equipped with ADF functions.
M3
J3110 *2 : If equipped with fax functions.
F04-103-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
1.3.2 Outlines of Functions

1.3.2.1 Image Processor PCB
It controls the machine as a whole, and communicates directly with all PCBs except the
sensor PCB and modular jack PCB.
Drive Control Block

The drive control mechanism acts on the reader motor and the ADF motor by the work of
the ASIC and motor drive IC.
Control Panel Control Block

The control panel control block receives the state of control keys while sending/receiving
data in serial communication with the control IC of the control panel PCB. Also, it sends
LED and LCD signals to the control panel PCB.
Image Processing Control Block

The image processing control block has the following functions:
• It subjects the digital image data from the analog processor PCB to enlargement/re-
duction processing, shading correction, smoothing, and other image processing,
thereby converting it to 600x600-dpi image signals (VD0, VD0*).
• It converts the analog image data from fax communication into 600x600-dpi image
signals (VD0, VD0*).
• It uses a horizontal sync signal (BD0*) as a trigger to send image signals (VD0,
VD0*) to the laser unit.
• The image data from the contact sensor is re-arranged, and the intensity of the contact
sensor LED is controlled.
Sensor Detection
It detects the state of each sensor of the rear unit and the ADF.
ESS Control
It controls the ESS function used to reduce the power consumption while the machine is
in standby state.
Memory Function
The 8MB (as mounted) SDRAM used for the storage of image data is capable of storing
about 79 pages in fax reception made of Canon Fax Standard Chart No.1. The image data is
backed up by a vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT2), so that it remains intact for
about 2 hr after the machine is deprived of power. The 128-KB SRAM is used to store user
data and service data, and is backed up by a lithium battery (BAT1) so that the data may be
retained for about 5 yr after the machine is deprived of power.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
Speaker Control (if equipped with fax functions.)

It turns on/off or control the volume of the error sound, key sound, and line monitor
sound generated by the speaker.
The volume of the line monitor or the sound of the key sound or the error
sound is adjusted in user mode.
Memo
Communication Control Block (if equipped with fax functions)

The communication control block detects line signals (CNG, DTMF). The 14.4-kps mo-
dem is controlled by the main CPU on the image processor PCB for modulation and de-
modulation of transmission/reception data. It also is used to send the DTMF signal.
1.3.2.2 DC Controller PCB
Fixing Heater Control Block

The fixing heater control block monitors the temperature reading of the thermistor to en-
sure that the temperature of the heater reaches a specific level. If an error is detected in the
temperature of the heater, it stops the power to the heater.
High-Voltage Control Block

The high-voltage control block controls the high voltage for the primary charging roller,
developing cylinder of the cartridge, transfer charging roller, and fixing film.
Drive Control Block

The drive control block controls the main motor, pickup solenoid, and fan.
Sensor Detection
It detects the state of the sensors in the pickup assemblies and the printer block, thereby
monitoring the drive assembly.
Image Processor PCB Interface block

The image processor PCB interface block sends the horizontal sync signal (BD0*) to the
image processor PCB. It also returns a state signal in response to a command signal (serial)
from the image processor PCB, thereby communicating the state of the printer block to the
image processor PCB.
Laser Control Block

The laser control block controls the drive of the laser diode of the laser scanner unit ac-
cording to the image signals (VD0, VD0*) from the image processor PCB. Also, it controls
the intensity of the laser diode (auto power control) for each line of print data.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
Horizontal Sync Signal Control

When the laser beam reaches the horizontal print start position, the laser beam detection
signal (BDI*) from the laser scanner unit is detected, and the horizontal sync signal (BD0*)
is sent to the image processor PCB. Also, the horizontal sync signal (BD*) is monitored for
frequency of output.
Scanner Motor Control

The scanner motor is controlled so that the horizontal resolution of the print image is 600
dpi. Also, the laser beam detection signal (BDI*) from the laser scanner unit is detected to
monitor the rotation of the scanner motor.
Cartridge Detection Mechanism

In wait state, the CPU on the DC controller PCB measures the voltage level of the car-
tridge detection signal (CRGSNS) a specific number of times to check the presence/absence
of the cartridge when an AC bias is applied to the primary charging roller.
Toner Level Detection Mechanism

While the machine is in wait state, the toner level detection signal (ADDTNR; based on
the comparison of the developing bias output and the antenna output inside the cartridge)
occurring when the developing AC bias is detected during normal rotation to monitor the
toner level inside the cartridge.
1.3.2.3 Control Panel PCB
Key Detection and LCD/LED Drive

The keys are monitored, and the LCD and LEDs are driven.
LCD Function
The LCD consisting of 2 lines of 20 characters is controlled according to the display sig-
nals from the image processor PCB.
Serial Communication Control

The state of the control keys is monitored based on serial communications with the image
processor PCB. LCD and LED drive data are received.
1.3.2.4 Power Supply PCB
Switching Regulator
The following is generated using power from the power outlet for loads: +24 DC, +12
VDC, +5 VSDC, +5 VDC, +3.3 VSDC, +3.3 VDC.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
1.3.2.5 Analog Processor PCB
The analog image data read by the contact sensor is converted into digital image data and
sent to the ASIC of the image processor PCB.
1.3.2.6 Sensor PCB
The signals from the ADF (copyboard cover) open/close sensor and the contact sensor
home position sensor are sent out to the image processor PCB via the analog processor
PCB.
1.3.2.7 Laser Driver/BD PCB
The image signals (VD0, VD0*) from the image processor PCB is converted into data
used for laser adjustment (to cause the laser diode to emit a laser beam). Also, the generated
laser beam is detected, and the laser beam detection signal (BDI*) is sent to the DC control-
ler PCB.
1.3.2.8 Main Motor/Scanner Motor Driver
The main motor/scanner motor is driven according to the drive signals from the DC con-
troller PCB.
1.3.2.9 Printer Controller PCB
The communications with the PC are controlled. The image data from the PC is converted
into print data for the machine, and is sent to the image processor PCB.
Communication Control
Communications with the PC are controlled using a bi-directional parallel interface (IEEE
std 1284-1994) or USB (Ver. 1.1). The communication protocols used for bi-directional
communications include: Nibble, ECP, Rapid Port.
The communication with the image processor PCB by means of a video interface are also
controlled.
USB Serial Number Notice Function

The USB serial number is communicated to the PC.
Smoothing
The 300 x 300-dpi image data from the PC is converted into image data equivalent of
1200 x 600 dpi; or, 600 x 600-dpi image data is converted into data equivalent of 2400 x
600-dpi.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
1.3.2.10 NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions)
2-Line/4-Line Conversion Circuit

Signals from a 2-line telephone line are converted into 4-line signals (transmission signals
and reception signals). Also, the transmission signals from the image processor PCB are
prevented from entering the reception circuit.
Dial Pulse Generation Circuit

The dial pulse generation circuit generates dial pulses by turning on and off the relay in-
side it according to the control signals from the image processor PCB. It then sends the dial
signals to the telephone line by way of the modular jack PCB.
Off-Hook Detection Circuit

An off-hook state is detected with reference to the direct current flowing into the circuit,
occurring when the telephone connected to the telephone terminal of the modular jack PCB
is off the hook.
Line Voltage Conversion Circuit

The primary side of the NCU PCB is controlled using a line voltage of +48 VDC. In light
of this, the DC component is cut by the capacitor, and only the audio signals are converted
into voltages suited to the modem level.
1.3.2.11 Modular Jack PCB (if equipped with fax functions)
The signals from the 2 modular jacks (for telephone line and telephone connection) are
communicated to the line voltage conversion circuit of the NCU PCB, and the signals from
the fax are communicated to the telephone line.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
1.4 Power-On Sequence

The following is the flow of operation occurring from when the machine is turned on un-
til it enters standby state:
Power-On
Initializes the CPU,

Clears the RAM, Sets the Port
• Checks the reader unit (open/close).

• Checks paper (cassette, manual tray).
• Detects size of paper (LGL; cassette).
• Checks the thermistor (open/short).
Starts communication
with the image processor PCB.
Checks the machine inside for residual paper.

Fixing Heater On
A jam is identified if the paper leading edge sensor
or the delivery sensor detects paper.
0.2 sec after the fixing heater goes ON, NO
is the fixing temperature 100˚C ? Or, has 0.5 sec
passedafter the fixing heater went ON?
YES A check is made for the presence/absence of a cartridge
when the primary charging AC bias is applied.
Fixing Heater OFF
Main Motor ON
The primary charging AC/DC bias,

Transfer Cleaning Bias ON
The toner level is checked when the developing bias is applied.
The developing AC/DC bias goes ON.
Auto delivery occurs

if the paper leading edge sensor detects paper.
The primary charging DC bias and
developing AC/DC bias go OFF.
The transfer cleaning bias goes OFF.
The main motor and

primary charging AC bias go OFF.
Standby
F04-104-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
1.5 Controlling the Main Motor

1.5.1 Outline
The rotation of the machine’s main motor (M1) is controlled by the drive signal (MON)
generated by the DC controller PCB.
The machine keeps the following ON at all times using the drive of the main motor,
thereby moving paper at the selected printing speed:
• vertical path roller

• registration roller
• primary charging roller
• developing cylinder
• photosensitive drum
• transfer charging roller
• fixing pressure roller
• delivery roller
The machine uses the activation of the cassette pickup solenoid or the manual feed pickup
solenoid as a trigger (occurring when the main motor is ON) to drive the following pickup
rollers for a specific period of time:
• cassette pickup roller

• manual feed pickup roller
Primary charging roller

Developing cylinder
Main motor
Photosensitive
drum Manual feed pickup roller
Vertical path roller
Delivery Fixing Transfer Registration roller

roller pressure charging Cassette pickup roller
roller roller
F04-105-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
2 Image Reading/Processing System

2.1 Outline
The image reading/processing system consists of the following major components:
• contact sensor used to read originals
• reader motor, drive pulley, drive belt, carriage, and carriage rail used to move the con-
tact sensor
• The analog processor PCB is used to convert the analog image data colleted by the
contact sensor into digital image data.
The image reading mechanism is controlled based on the drive signals from the image
processor PCB, thereby moving the contact sensor to read the original placed on the
copyboard glass. (F04-201-01)
When the ADF is used, the contact sensor is moved to stream reading position, and the
originals are read when they are moved by the ADF.
Stream reading position

with ADF in use
Contact sensor
Drive pulley
Carriage
Analog processor PCB
(forward)
Drive belt
(reverse)
Contact sensor
home position sensor
Carriage rail
Reader motor
Drive belt
Drive pulleys
F04-201-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
3 Laser Exposure System

3.1 Outline
The laser scanner unit consists of the following major components:
• laser unit, which serves as the source of laser beam.
• laser scanner motor, equipped with a 4-face mirror for laser scanning.
• laser driver/BD PCB used to detect laser beam or to control emission of laser beam.
The laser beam generated by the laser unit based on the signals from the DC controller
PCB moves through the collimator lens (inside the laser unit) and the cylindrical lens to
reach a 4-face polygon mirror rotating at a constant speed.
When reflected by the 4-face polygon mirror, the laser beam moves through the imaging
lens, and is bent by the reflecting mirror to reach the photosensitive drum. At this time, the
laser beam also is directed to the BD circuit of the laser driver/BD PCB. (F04-301-01)
As the 4-face polygon mirror rotates at a constant speed, the laser beam scans the surface
of the photosensitive drum at a constant speed, thereby removing charges and forming static
images.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
4-face mirror
Imaging lens
Laser driver/BD PCB Laser scanner motor
Cylindrical lens Reflecting mirror
Laser unit
BD block
Las ection
det I*)
Laser driver block

(BD
Image signal
(VDO,VDO*)
er b sig
eam nal
Photosensitive drum
Image processor PCB

motor drive signal
Laser scanner
Communication
control signal
sync signal
Laser driver
Horizontal
control
• copy image data

DC controller PCB • print image data
• fax image data (if equipped with fax functions)
F04-301-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
4 Image Formation System

4.1 Outline
F04-401-01 shows the construction of the image formation system.
The machine is a cartridge type, in which the core of its image formation components are
constructed as a signal entity: photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing cyl-
inder, cleaning blade, and toner housing.
The DC controller PCB has a built-in high-voltage output assembly, and generates high
voltage for charging at such times as necessary.
Cartridge
DC controller PCB
Primary J205
charging roller
J207
Cleaning blade
J208
Developing High-voltage
Drum cylinder output block
Transfer guide
Transfer charging
Static roller J209
eliminator
F04-401-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
5 Pickup/Feeding/Delivery System
5.1 Outline
The machine is not equipped with a paper width detection mechanism. It uses center ref-
erence, in which paper moves centered through the pickup/feeding/delivery path.
The source of paper may be from any of two: cassette and manual feed tray. Once picked
from the cassette or the manual feed tray, the paper is corrected so that any skew is removed
by the registration shutter and is sent as far as the registration roller. Thereafter, the paper is
controlled so that its leading edge matches the leading edge of the image on the photosensi-
tive drum by means of the paper leading edge sensor (PS102); it then is moved through the
transfer, separation, feeding, and fixing assemblies to reach the delivery tray.
The machine is equipped with 5 sensors to monitor the movement of paper; the names
and the functions of these sensors are as follows:
Notation Name Function

PS3 Delivery sensor Detects the state of paper in the delivery assembly.
PS4 Manual feed tray paper sensor Detects the presence/absence of paper in the manual
feed tray.
PS101 LGL paper sensor Detects paper inside the cassette to see if it is of LGL
size.
PS102 Paper leading edge sensor Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of paper to
measure its length. Also, it controls the timing of acti-
vation of the laser.
PS103 Cassette paper sensor Detects the presence/absence of paper in the cassette.
T04-501-01
PS103 PS4
PS3 PS101
PS102
F04-501-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
5.2 Pickup Operation

5.2.1 Pickup from the Cassette
5.2.1.1 Outline
Paper is picked up from the cassette under the control of the CPU on the DC controller
PCB and using the drive of the main motor (M1). When the cassette pickup solenoid (SL2)
goes ON, the drive of the main motor (M1) is transmitted to the cassette pickup roller as-
sembly to rotate the cassette pickup roller.
When the cassette pickup roller rotates, a single sheet of paper is separated from the stack
by the separation claws of the cassette, and is sent as far as the registration shutter by way of
the vertical path roller.
DC controller PCB
Cassette pick solenoid drive signal
Main motor
Gear B
Cassette pickup rollers

Gear A
Paper
Spring
SL2
When SL2 goes ON, the spring will turn

the pickup roller slightly with the result
that the gear A engages with the gear B.
F04-502-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
5.2.1.2 Retry Pickup
If the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) does not detect paper within a specific period of
time after the cassette pickup roller has started to rotate, the machine will start to rotate the
cassette pickup roller once again to execute a retry pickup operation.
If the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) still does not detect paper within a specific pe-
riod of time after the machine executes a retry pickup operation once, the machine will iden-
tify the condition as a jam and will indicate a jam message on the LCD.
5.2.1.3 Detecting the Size of Paper
The machine detects the size of paper in the cassette in any of two ways: LGL size detec-
tion and non-LGL size detection.
LGL detection is performed by means of a LGL paper sensor (PS101). The LGL size de-
tection mechanism is used to prevent picking up a subsequent sheet of paper before the trail-
ing edge of paper leaves the cassette, otherwise occurring if the pickup was let to occur at
the same time using other sizes when picking up LGL paper.
Non-LGL detection is performed using the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) based on
the length of paper. In fax mode, if paper of a size different from the size selected from the
control panel is placed, the DC controller will identify a paper size mismatch at the end of
printing and indicate a message on the LCD.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
5.2.2 Pickup from the Manual Feed Tray

5.2.2.1 Outline
Paper is picked up from the manual feed tray under the control of the CPU on the DC
controller PCB and using the drive of the main motor (M1). When the manual feed pickup
solenoid (SL1) goes ON, the drive of the main motor (M1) is transmitted as far as the
manual feed pickup roller assembly to rotate the manual feed pickup roller.
The sheets of paper stacked in the manual feed tray are lifted by the work of a spring and
forced against the manual feed pickup roller. Thereafter, a single sheet of paper is separated
by the work of the manual feed pickup roller and the separation pad, and is moved as far as
the registration shutter.
DC controller PCB
Manual feed tray pickup
solenoid drive signal
SL1
Gear A
Gear B
Main motor
Manual feed tray

pickup roller
Cam
When SL1 goes ON, the spring moves up to push up

the cam, causing the manual feed pickup roller to
rotate slightly; as a result, the gear A and the gear B
become engaged.
F04-502-02

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
5.2.2.2 Retry Pickup
If the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) does not detect paper within a specific period of
time after the manual feed pickup roller starts to rotate, the machine will rotate the manual
feed pickup roller once again to execute a retry pickup operation. If the paper leading edge
sensor (PS102) still does not detect the leading edge of paper after the machine executes a
retry pickup operation once, the machine will identify the condition as a jam and will indi-
cate a jam message on the LCD.
5.2.2.3 Detecting the Size of Paper
The size of paper in the manual feed tray is detected using the paper leading edge sensor
(PS102) with reference to the length of paper. In fax mode, if paper of a size different from
the size selected from the control panel is placed, the DC controller will identify a paper size
mismatch at the end of printing and indicate a message on the LCD.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
5.3 Feeding Operation/Delivery Operation

5.3.1 Outline
The machine uses the following to feed/deliver paper:

• delivery roller
The paper moved as far as the registration shutter by the work of the various pick opera-
tions is corrected for skew movement when it is butted against the registration roller.
When the paper moves past the registration assembly, the paper leading edge sensor
(PS102) detects its leading edge, thereby ensuring that the leading edge of the paper will
match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum. Thereafter, the paper is
moved past the photosensitive drum and then is moved over the transfer charging roller, fix-
ing pressure roller, and delivery roller.
Paper
Resistration
shutter
F04-503-01
5.3.2 Auto Delivery Control
The machine drives the main motor (M1) for a specific period of time to feed/delivery
roller when the power is turned on, when the reader unit is returned to its initial position, or
when it shifts from ESS mode, in addition to the following:
a. after starting the main motor (M1), the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) detects paper.
b. the size of the paper delivered last is B5 or smaller, and the delivery sensor (PS3) detects
paper after the main motor (M1) is started.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
5.4 Reducing the Copying Speed

5.4.1 Outline
The machine is not equipped with a paper width detection mechanism; for this reason, if
paper with a limited width is used in continuous printing, the ends of the fixing heater
would overheat. To prevent overheating, the machine switches among 3 copying speeds with
reference to the readings of the sub thermistor.
1. Normally, the machine reduces the speed to 4 ppm when the reading of the sub ther-
mistor reaches 245°C/473°F or higher.
2. The machine will further reduce the copying speed to 3 ppm if the reading of the sub
thermistor reaches 255°C/491°F or higher after it has reduced it to 4 ppm.
3. The machine will further reduce the copying speed to 2 ppm if the reading of the sub
thermistor reaches 260°C/500°F or higher after it has reduced it to 3 ppm.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
5.5 Detecting Jams

5.5.1 Outline
The machine is equipped with 6 sensors used to detect jams.

The presence/absence of paper is checked with reference to the state of each sensor at
such times as stored in the CPU on the DC controller PCB. When the machine detects a jam,
it will turn off the main motor (M1) and will indicate a jam message on the LCD.
5.5.2 Types of Jams
The machine groups jams into 8 types. When a jam occurs, be sure to remove it, and start
over the operation.
a. Pickup Delay Jam

After execution of a pickup retry, the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) does not detect
the leading edge of paper within a specific period of time, or no paper exists at time of a
pickup retry.
b. Paper Leading Edge Sensor Stationary Jam

After the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) has detected the leading edge of paper, the
paper leading edge sensor (PS102) does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a spe-
cific period of time.
c. Delivery Sensor Leading Edge Delay Jam

After the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) has detected the leading edge of paper, the
delivery sensor (PS3) does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specific period of
time.
d. Fixing Wrap Jam

After the delivery sensor (PS3) has detected the leading edge of paper, the delivery sensor
(PS3) detects the absence of paper before a specific period of time.
e. Delivery Sensor Trailing Edge Delay Jam

After the delivery sensor (PS3) has detected the leading edge of paper, the delivery sensor
(PS3) does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specific period of time.
f. Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam

• As part of operation after a pickup delay jam, the delivery sensor (PS3) detects the
trailing edge of paper; however, the delivery sensor (PS3) once again detects the trail-
ing edge of paper, the laser is forced OFF, and a specific period of time passes.
• As part of operation after a pickup delay jam, the delivery sensor (PS3) detects paper,
the laser is forced OFF, and a specific period of time passes.
• At time of cleaning the fixing pressure roller, the trailing edge of paper does not move
past the delivery sensor (PS3; i.e., the sensor does not go OFF) within a specific pe-
riod of time.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
g. Auto Delivery Jam

• When the fixing heater is started, the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) detects the
presence of paper.
• The paper group is not known or the paper last subjected to length detection is identi-
fied as being LTR or larger; under either of these conditions, the delivery sensor (PS3)
detects paper within 2 sec after the fixing heater starts.
• The size of the paper last subjected to length detection is identified as being LTR or
larger, and the delivery sensor (PS3) detects paper within 2 sec after the main motor
starts.
• While auto delivery is under way, the machine identifies the absence of a cartridge.
h. Door Open Jam

During printing, the reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1) has detected movement
(sliding) for the reader unit.
Presence/absence of cartridge
SW1 (for jam h) (for jam g; developing bias)
PS4 (for jam a)

PS3 (for jam c, d, e, f, or g) PS103 (for jam a)
PS102 (for jam a, b, or g)
F04-505-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
6 Fixing System
6.1 Outline
The fixing pressure roller and the delivery roller are driven by the main motor.
The paper separated from the photosensitive drum is moved to the inside of the fixing as-
sembly; the paper is then moved outside it after the toner is fused to the paper by the work
of the fixing film and the fixing pressure roller.
The delivery sensor (PS3) is used to detect paper coming out of the fixing assembly.
Delivery roller Fixing film Fixing heater
Delivery sensor (PS3) Fixing pressure Fixing inlet guide

roller
F04-601-01
Fixing heater (H1)
Thermal fuse (FU2)
Fixing film
Sub thermistor (TH2)
Main thermistor (TH1)
Fixing pressure roller

F04-601-02

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
6.2 Controlling the Fixing Operation

6.2.1 Controlling the Fixing Temperature
The fixing film unit has a plate-shaped fixing heater built into it for heating the fixing
film.
The fixing heater is equipped with 2 thermistor: a main thermistor in the middle and a sub
thermistor at the end. The main thermistor is used to control the temperature of the fixing
heater and to detect its overheating, while the sub thermistor is used to detect an error tem-
perature on the end of the fixing heater.
The CPU on the DC controller PCB monitors the main thermistor signal (FSRTH) and the
sub thermistor signal (SUBTH) from the thermistors for control of the fixing heater drive
signal (FSRD0) and the relay drive signal (RLYD), thus varying the supply of power to the
heater and, ultimately, controlling the temperature of the fixing heater.
Image processor PCB
Fixing assembly DC controller PCB
Fixing heater high tempe-

Sub
rature error detection
thermistor
Fixing SUBTH
heater FSRTH
CPU
Main
thermistor
Power supply PCB +3.3V
FSRDO
RLYD
+24V
F04-602-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
The CPU on the DC controller PCB executes the following 4 types of fixing temperature
control:
• Start-Up Temperature Control

In response to a print command from the image processor PCB, the temperature of the
fixing heater is started up to a level 15°C/59°F lower than paper passage control temperature
target.
• Paper Passage Temperature Control

While printing is taking place, the fixing heater temperature is controlled so that it is iden-
tical with the paper passage control temperature target.
• Sheet-to-Sheet Temperature Control

To prevent overheating of areas not covered by paper (between sheets), the fixing heater
temperature is controlled to a level relatively lower than the paper passage control tempera-
ture target.
• Rest Heating Temperature Control

While the machine is at rest, the fixing pressure roller is heated so that the toner collecting
on it is melted and moved to the fixing film, thereby ridding the roller of toner.
The rest heating control mechanism is used to control the temperature of the fixing heater
to a level lower than the paper passage target level when LTR or larger paper is used for
printing.
The control temperature targets are switched in reference to the following 4 conditions:
• paper type (as indicated by a command during printing)
• type of control (cover paper or between sheets)
• change in fixing temperature control (OFF → start-up → paper passage, etc.)
• count of prints in continuous mode

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
6.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Bias
The machine is equipped with a fixing film bias control mechanism which is controlled
by the CPU on the DC controller PCB. The fixing film bias is used to prevent displacement
of toner deposits; i.e., when the primary charging roller DC bias is applied, a bias of the
same polarity as the toner is applied to the fixing film so as to create a magnetic field be-
tween the paper and the film.
DC controller PCB
Rimary
J205 charging
Primary charging
Superposition roller
roller
AC bias drive circuit
Photosensitive
CPU drum
Primary charging
roller
DC bias drive circuit
J206
Fixing film
F04-602-02
6.2.3 Fixing Heater Safety Mechanism
The fixing heater safety circuit is part of the DC controller PCB, and is used to monitor
the fixing temperature for an error at all times. If the output voltage for the main thermistor
or the sub thermistor reaches about 0.37 V or lower (about 310°C/590°F), the relay will be
turned off regardless of the state of the relay drive signal (RLYD) from the CPU to shut the
power to the fixing heater.
If the temperature of the fixing heater increases abnormally, on the other hand, to exceed
about 230°C/446°F, the thermal fuse will melt to cut the power to the fixing heater.
6.2.4 Detecting a Fault in the Fixing Assembly
The CPU on the DC controller PCB will identify a fault in the fixing assembly if any of
the following conditions (a through f) occurs; as a result,
• it will cut the power to the fixing heater.
• it will cause the relay drive signal (RYLD) to go ‘1’ to turn off the relay and, at the
same time, will communicate the presence of a fault to the image processor PCB.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
a. Overheating 1 (all conditions)

The CPU will identify overheating 1 if the main thermistor detects 230°C/446°F for 1 sec
or more continuously.
b. Start-Up Error 1 (start-up)

The CPU will identify start-up error 1 if a level of temperature lower than 120°C/248°F is
detected for 1 sec or more continuously 10 sec after the heater is supplied with power.
c. Start-Up Error 2 (startup/paper passage)

The CPU will identify start-up error 2 if a level of temperature 15°C/59°F lower than the
paper passage temperature control target is not detected at all 75 sec after the heater is sup-
plied with power.
d. Temperature Control Low Temperature Error (paper passage/sheet-to-sheet/rest

heating/temperature control)
The CPU will identify a temperature control low condition error if a level of temperature
lower than 120°C/248°F is detected for 1 sec or more continuously in paper passage, sheet-
to-sheet, rest heating, or temperature control state.
e. Main thermistor Open Circuit (all conditions)

The CPU will identify main thermistor open circuit if the A/D conversion value of the
output voltage from the main thermistor is in excesss of a specific value for 1 sec or more.
f. Overheating 2 (all conditions)

The CPU will identify overheating 2 if the sub thermistor detects 300°C/572°F or higher
for 0.2 sec over more continuously.
g. Sub Thermistor Error Low Temperature 1 (warm-up)

The CPU will identify sub thermistor error low temperature 1 if the temperature reading is
lower than 75°C/167°F for 1 sec or more 10 sec after the heater is first supplied with power.
h. Sub Thermistor Error Low Temperature 2 (cool-down)

The CPU will identify sub thermistor error low temperature 2 if all the following condi-
tions exit when the heater is off after printing ends and the trailing edge of the paper moves
past the delivery sensor.
• the thermistor reading is lower than 75°C/167°F when the heater is off.
• printing has not been cancelled in the middle.
• no error has occurred during printing.
• the thermistor reading is lower than 75°C/167°F before the trailing edge of the paper
moves past the delivery sensor.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
7 Power Supply System

7.1 Low Voltage Circuit
7.1.1 Low Voltage Power Supply Circuit
The machine’s DC power supply is generated by the power supply PCB.

The AC power arriving at the power supply PCB is converted into the following for sup-
ply to loads: +3.3 VDC, +3.3 VSDC, +5 VDC, +5 VSDC, +12 VDC, +24 VDC.
See the following for an outline of the DC power supply:
Output voltage Output voltage value

+3.3V +3.4V ± 3%
+3.3VS*1 +3.4V ± 3%
+5.1V +5.1V ± 3%
+5.1VS*1 +5.1V ± 3%
+12V +12V ± 3%
+24V +24V ± 3%
*1: Also supplied during ESS mode.
T04-701-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
To NCU PCB
Power supply PCB

+3.3V Analog +5V
F1 F2 Sensor PCB
processor
NF +8V +8V
PCB Contact sensor
P1 +3.3V
+5V Laser
+24V scanner unit
Low-voltage power +24V
Solenoids
supply circuit
+3.3V +24V
+3.3 V circuit +3.3VS Main motor
+5V +3.3V
Sensors
+ 5 V circuit +5VS
Image processor PCB
+5V Control
+12 V circuit +12V +5VS panel PCB
F101 +24V +3.3V
+24 V circuit +3.3VS Modular jack
NCU PCB*2
+12V PCB*2
+24V
Reader motor
+24V
+5V
ADF unit*1
+3.3V +24V
DC controller PCB ADF motor
+5V
ADF sensors
+24V +3.3VS
Fan Printer controller
+5VS PCB
Manual feed tray +3.3V
paper sensor +24V Reader unit
slide detecting
+3.3V • Cassette paper sensor switch
• Paper leading edge
sensor
• LGL paper sensor
*1 : Only if equipped with ADF functions.

*2 : Only if equipped with fax functions.
F04-701-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
7.1.2 Protective Functions

The power supply PCB is equipped with an over-current/over-voltage protection mecha-
nism to prevent damage to the power circuit in the event of an over-current or over-voltage,
as caused by a short circuit or the like on the load side. If the over-current/over-voltage pro-
tective mechanism has gone ON, disconnect the power cord, and correct the fault; then, con-
nect the power cord once again to reset the machine. If short circuiting and resetting are re-
peated, the internal fuse (F1, F2, F101) can melt.
7.2 High-Voltage Power Supply Circuit

The high voltage output circuit is built into the DC controller PCB.
The CPU on the DC controller PCB sends instructions for the generation of the following
high voltages at specific timing:
• primary charging roller bias (AC voltage + DC negative voltage)
• developing bias (AC voltage + DC negative voltage)
• transfer charging roller bias (DC positive voltage or DC negative voltage)
7.3 Controlling the ESS Mechanism

7.3.1 Outline
The machine is equipped with an ESS mechanism to limit the consumption of power in
standby as much as possible. The ESS function is controlled by the image processor PCB,
and the machine shifts to ESS mode when the Energy Saver key in the control panel is
pressed or the machine remains in standby state for a specific period of time.
The standby period after which the ESS mode is started is set in user mode: 3 to 30 min
(factory default: 5 min).
7.3.2 Operation
While the machine remains in ESS mode, all in the control panel except the LED indica-
tor of the Energy Saver key will remain OFF. The machine will not shift to ESS mode under
any of the following conditions:
• The shift to ESS mode is not enabled in user mode.
• A jam or a service error occurred, and the Alarm lamp is ON. (In the case of the ab-
sence of toner or paper, the machine shifts to ESS mode in the absence of paper.)
• The image memory contains image data.*1
While the machine is in ESS mode, it will shift out of the state in response to a press on
the Energy Saver key; in addition, it will automatically shift out of the state under any of the
following conditions:
• Print data arrives from the PC.
• A fax arrives.*1
• Off-hook state is detected.*1
• A report output time occurs.*1
• A timer call time occurs.*1

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
8 Others
8.1 Fan
8.1.1 Outline
The machine is equipped with a single fan at the rear of the delivery assembly to cool the
laser scanner unit, to discharge heat from around the fixing assembly, to cool the elements
of the PCBs, and to discharge ozone.
The fan is controlled by the CPU on the DC controller PCB for the following:
• full-speed rotation while the main motor is in operation.

• full-speed rotation for 30 sec and half-speed rotation for 60 sec after the main motor
stops.
• full-speed rotation for 30 sec and half-speed rotation for 60 sec during WAIT.
The CPU on the DC controller PCB generates the fan drive signal (FANON) based on the
state of the fan stop signal (FANSTOP; 0: reset, 1: rotate) and the full-speed/half-speed
switch signal (FANHALF; 0: half-speed, 1: full-speed) to control the fan rotation to any of
three: rest, half-speed, full-speed.
Main motor
• Power supply PCB
• DC controller PCB
Laser scanner unit
Fixing assembly
Cartridge
F04-801-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
8.2 Back-Up Batteries

8.2.1 Back-Up Function
8.2.1.1 Outline
The machine’s image processor PCB is equipped with a lithium battery (BAT1) and a va-
nadium lithium secondary battery (BAT2) for back-up of the data in the SRAM and the
SDARM in consideration of a power outage or when the power is turned off.
The lithium battery (BAT1) and the vanadium lithium secondary battery
(BAT2) contain combustible material (lithium, organic solvent), and can
burst or burn in flames if thrown into fire.
Take full care in handling the batteries, as taking them apart can cause the
organic solvent to leak to damage the skin. To dispose, be sure to separate
them from other items and observe appropriate rules.
8.2.1.2 Lithium Battery (BAT1)
The data backed up in the SRAM by the lithium battery (BAT1) contains user data for fax
functions, communications control data, and service mode settings.
Battery life: about 5 yr
The LCD will indicate ‘DATA ERROR’ when the power is tuned on after the lithium bat-
tery (BAT1) has reached the end of its life. If such a condition has occurred, be sure to re-
place the image processor PCB according to the instructions given in 1.4.1 of Chapter 7.
If you disconnect the jumper plug (JP1) of the image processor PCB and
turn off the power, all control data will be reset to default settings. Do not
disconnect the jumper plug (JP1) to prevent the loss of data.
The pin of the jumper plug (JP1) is displaced on the image processor PCB
available as a service part so as to prevent exhaustion of the lithium battery
Memo
(BAT1).

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
Vanadium lithium
secondary battery
(BAT2)
Lithium battery Jumper plug

(BAT1) (JP1)
F04-802-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
8.2.1.3 Vanadium Lithium Secondary Battery (BAT2)
The data backed up by the vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT2) is image data used
for fax transmission/reception, and it does not include the image data for memory copying.
Back-up time: about 2 hr (assuming that the machine is kept ON for 5 day or more un-
der normal temperature/pressure conditions)
Battery life: about 5 yr or after repeating charging and discharging 40 times at 100%
If the backup data cannot be stored longer than half the indicated period (even after the
machine has been powered for 5 day or longer under normal temperature and atmospheric
conditions), suspect that the battery has reached the end of its life.
If the foregoing back-up time is exceeded, the image data stored in

SDRAM will be lost. To prevent loss of image data for service work or re-
location, be sure to print out the image data stored in SDRAM before start-
ing the work.
Memory Clear List

If the memory clear list is automatically printed when the machine is turned
Memo on, the image data indicated on the list is the data that was lost without
back-up. After the list is printed, the image data storage and the control in-
formation will automatically be deleted. The following is a sample of the
memory clear list:
07/30/2001 17:52 FAX 001
*** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * MEMORY CLEAR REPORT * * *
*** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
MEMORY FILES DELETED
TX/RX NO MODE DESTINATION TEL/ID PGS. SET TIME ST. TIME

0002 DELAYED TX 1 07/30 13:51 13:59
0002 DELAYED TX 1 07/30 13:51 13:51
0002 MEMORY RX 1 07/30 13:53 -----
0002 MEMORY RX 1 07/30 13:54 -----
F04-802-02

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
8.2.2 Back-Up Data

8.2.2.1 Types of Data
The types of data backed up by the data back-up lithium batteries (BAT1, BAT2) on the
image processor PCB are as follows: a, b, and c are stored in the SRAM (backed up by
BAT1), while d is the data stored in the SDRAM (backed up by BAT2).
a. User Data
Item Description
register/set 1. data register (various settings of reception/transmission mode)
2. telephone number register (one-touch dial, etc)
T04-802-01
b. Service Mode Data
Item Description
#1. SSSW error control, echo remedy, etc.
#2. MENU NL equalizer, transmission level, etc.
#3. NUMERIC Param FAX/TEL switch parameter, etc.
#4A. SPECIAL not used normally
#4B. NCU not used normally
#4C. ISDN not used normally
#5. TYPE not used normally
#6. SCANNER image position adjustment, etc.
#7. PRINTER reduction, etc.
#8. PDL malfunction
#9. COUNTER reading counter, print counter, etc.
#10. REPORT system dump list, key history report output, etc.
#11. DOWN LOAD malfunction
#12. CLEAR various data initialization, etc.
#13. ROM version No., checksum, etc.
#14. CS SET malfunction
T04-802-02

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
c. Control Data
Item Description
communication control record most recent 20 communications (reception/transmission)
system dump record past communications state, error communication history, etc.
T04-802-03
d. Data Backed Up by BAT2
Item Description
Transmission image transmission (memory transmission, broadcast)
timer transmission
timer broadcast
reception image memory reception
T04-802-04

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
8.2.2.2 Printing the Backup Data List
The data baked up in control memory may be printed in the form of a list.
If you are replacing the image processor PCB, be sure to print out the list in
advance. For the method of printing, see 2.2 or 3.21 of Chapter 2.
a. User Data
Item List
register mode user data list
dial register mode 1-touch spd dial list
1-touch spd dail list (detail)
coded speed dial list
coded speed dial list (detail)
group dial list
T04-802-05
b. Service Mode Data
Item List
service mode data system data list
T04-802-06
c. Control Data
Item List
communication control record activity report
system dump record system dump list
T04-802-07

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
9 ADF (if equipped with ADF functions)

9.1 Outline
The ADF is a feeding device used exclusively for stream reading, and its series of opera-
tions (original pickup, feeding, delivery) is performed using the drive of the ADF motor
(M3).
An original picked from the original placement assembly is controlled so that its move-
ment will match the read start timing of the host machine’s contact sensor. Then, the original
is moved as far as stream reading position, read by the contact sensor (for collection of ana-
log image data), and sent to the delivery assembly.
The ADF has 3 sensors to monitor the state of the original. The names and the functions
of the sensors are as follows:
Symbol Sensor Function

PS6 Original sensor Detects the presence/absence of an original in the
original placement assembly.
PS7 Registration sensor Detects the timing at which the leading edge of an
original is made to arch at the ADF registration
roller.
PS8 Original delivery sensor Monitors the movement of the original in the origi-
nal delivery assembly.
T04-901-01
PS8
PS6 PS7
F04-901-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
9.2 Picking Up and Moving Originals

9.2.1 Outline
The ADF picks up and moves originals under the control of the CPU on the host
machine’s image processor PCB and using the drive of the ADF motor (M3).
When the host machine’s Start key is pressed, with an original placed in the original tray,
the ADF motor starts to rotate counterclockwise and the pickup roller moves down to move
up the original stopper. At the same time, the original pickup roller and the original separa-
tion roller start to rotate.
When the original pickup roller and the original separation roller rotate, a single original
is separated by the work of the original separation roller and the original separation pad, and
its leading edge is detected by the registration sensor. The original is then sent as far as the
ADF registration roller; a specific period of time after the registration sensor detects the
leading edge, the ADF motor starts to rotate clockwise to move up the original pickup roller
and move down the original stopper.
The ADF motor rotates clockwise to rotate the ADF registration roller, white roller, origi-
nal feed roller, and original delivery roller to move and deliver the original.
ON when ADF motor rotates CCW

ON when ADF motor rotates CW
Original
Original stopper Original delivery roller
ADF motor pickup roller
Original separation roller
ADF registration roller White roller Original feed roller
F04-902-01

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
9.2.2 Moving Down the Original Pickup Roller and Moving Up the Original
Stopper
The original pickup roller is kept in up position during standby, thereby ensuring a gap
used to accommodate a stack of originals. The original stopper is kept in down position dur-
ing standby to prevent the original from sliding too far inside the machine when it is placed.
When the ADF motor (M3) rotates counterclockwise to start original pickup operation,
the drive of the timing belt moves down the original pickup roller and, at the same time, the
original stopper starts to move up, causing an original to be picked up and sent inside the
machine.
Original stopper
Original separation roller
Original stopper
Timing belt
(feed direction) Original pickup roller
F04-902-02

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
9.3 Detecting an Original Jam

9.3.1 Outline
The ADF is equipped with 2 sensors to detect original jams. The CPU on the host
machine’s image processor PCB checks the presence of paper over the sensor at such times
as stored in advance; if it identifies a jam, it turns off the ADF motor (M3) and indicates a
jam message on the LCD.
9.3.2 Types of Jams

The machine identifies a jam as one of 6 types. When a jam has occurred, be sure to re-
move it, open and then close the ADF, place the original once again, and start over.
a. Registration Sensor Delay Jam

After separation is started, the registration sensor (PS7) does not detect the leading edge
of paper within a specific period of time.
b. Registration Sensor Stationary Jam

After the registration sensor (PS7) detects the leading edge of paper, it detects the trailing
edge of paper before a specific period of time.
d. Original Delivery Sensor Delay Jam

After the registration sensor (PS7) detects the leading edge of paper, the original delivery
sensor (PS8) does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specific period of time.
e. Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam

After the registration sensor (PS7) detects the trailing edge of paper, the original delivery
sensor (PS8) does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specific period of time.
f. ADF Open Jam

While an original is being moved, the host machine’s ADF (copyboard cover) open/close
sensor (PS2) detects a condition indicating that the ADF is open.
PS8 (for jam a, d, or e)
PS7 (for jam a, b, or c)
PS2 (for jam f)

F04-903-01

CHAPTER 5
MECHANICAL SYSTEM

1 Points to Note When Disassembling/Assembling

the Machine
The mechanical characteristics and sequences of operation are described together with ex-
planations of how the machine may be disassembled and assembled; keep the following in
mind when disassembling/assembling the machine:
1. Disconnect the power plug and the modular cable in advance for safety. Be sure also
to disconnect all cables used to connector the machine to the PC.
2. Reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine when assembling the machine, i.e.,
unless otherwise stated.
3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. The mounting screws for the grounding wire and varistors come with a toothed washer
to ensure electrical continuity. Be sure not to leave out the washers.
5. Do not, as a rule, operate the machine with any of its parts removed.
6. Touch a metal portion of the machine before handling PCBs and contact sensor, thereby
protecting PCBs against static damage.

7. Take care not to touch the light guide assembly of the contact sensor.
8. Take care not to lose the spacer of the contact sensor during the work. Moreover, be sure
to fit it correctly at the end of the work.
Light guide
assembly
(translucent)
Spacer
Selfoc lens array

(black)
Spacer
F05-101-01
9. Do not throw the cartridge into fire; it may explode.

10. As needed, take out the cartridge, and keep it in a protective bag
11. Keep the fixing screws separately; they tend to fall inside the machine.
12. If you have removed the read unit, check to make sure that the reader unit moves.
smoothly.

2 Disassembly
2.1 Externals/Auxiliary System
2.1.1 External Covers
[1] ADF (copyboard cover)

[2] Cartridge cover
[3] Front cover
[4] Delivery cover
[5] Delivery upper cover [2]
[6] Delivery rear cover
[7] Left cover [1]
[7]
[6] [5]
[4] [3]
F05-201-01
[8] Right door

[9] Manual feed tray
O
K
7
0
4
8
#
1
5
9
[10] Rear cover

2
6
3
[9]
[8]
[10]
F05-201-02

2.1.1.1 Removing the Left Cover/Rear Cover
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the [3]

left cover [2].
2) Remove the 13 screws [3], and detach
the rear cover [4].
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F05-201-03
2.1.1.2 Removing the Right Cover
1) Slide the reader unit, and open the car-

tridge cover.
2) Open the manual feed tray.
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the
right cover [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
F05-201-04

2.1.1.3 Removing the Front Cover
1) Remove the right cover. (See 2.1.1.2) [2]

2) Remove the control panel. (See 2.1.2)
3) Remove the cassette.
4) Remove the screw [1].
5) Free the 5 hooks [2], and detach the
front cover [3].
[1] [3] [2]
F05-201-05
2.1.1.4 Removing the Delivery Cover
1) Remove the left cover. (See 2.1.1.1) [2]

delivery cover [2].
[1]
F05-201-06

2.1.1.5 Removing the Delivery Upper Cover/Delivery Rear Cover
1) Remove the delivery cover. (See 2.1.1.4) [1]

2) Slide the reader unit.
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
delivery upper cover [2].
4) Remove the delivery rear cover [3].
[3] [2]
F05-201-07
2.1.1.6 Removing the Cartridge Cover
1) Remove the reader unit. (See 2.3.3) [3]

[1]
2) Free the hook [1].
3) Remove the 2 ribs [2], and detach the
cartridge cover [3].
[2]
F05-201-08

2.1.1.7 Removing the Upper Cover
1) Remove the front cover. (See 2.1.1.3)

2) Remove the cartridge cover. (See
2.1.1.6)
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
[1] [1]
F05-201-09

[2] [2] [3]
the plate [3] and the upper cover [4].
[2]
[4] [2]
F05-201-10

2.1.1.8 Removing the Right Door
1) Remove the manual feed tray (lower). [1]

(See 2.6.4)
right door [2].
[2]
F05-201-11
2.1.2 Removing the Control Panel
1) Slide the reader unit, and open the car-

tridge cover.
2) Remove the screw [1], and slide the
control panel [2] to the left.
[2] [1]
F05-201-12

3) Close the cartridge cover.

4) Disconnect the connector [3], and de-
tach the control panel [2].
To prevent damage to the

flexible cable, be sure to lift
the control panel slightly as
shown when disconnecting
the connector [3].
[3] [2]
F05-201-13
[5]
To mount the control panel,
turn it over as shown in
Memo
F05-201-14, and connect
the connector [4]; then, turn
back over [5] the control
panel to facilitate the work.
[4]
F05-201-14

2.1.3 Removing the Copyboard Glass
1) Open the ADF (copyboard cover). [1] [3]

copyboard glass retainer [2].
3) Remove the copyboard glass [3].
[2]
F05-201-15
2.1.4 Removing the Main Motor Unit
1) Remove the upper cover. (See 2.1.1.7)

2) Remove the image processor PCB. (See
2.2.1) [1]
3) Remove the NCU PCB. (if equipped
with fax functions; See 2.2.5)
4) Remove the modular jack PCB. (if
equipped with fax functions; See 2.2.6)
5) Remove the plastic film [1].
F05-201-16

6) Pick the hook [2] with long nose pliers [2]

or the like, and detach the registration
roller gear [3].
Take care not to break the

claw when removing the
gear.
[3]
F05-201-17
7) Remove the 6 screws [4], and detach the [5] [4]

plate [5].
[4]
[4]
F05-201-18

8) Remove the 5 screws [6], and detach the [6]

plate [7]. [6]
[7]
F05-201-19
9) Free the 3 hooks [8]. [9]

10) Disconnect the 3 connectors [9], and de-
tach the harness [10].
[8] [8]
[9]
[10] [8]
F05-201-20

11) Remove the 7 screws [11], and detach [11] [12] [11]
the main motor unit [12].
[11]
[11]
F05-201-21

2.1.5 Remove the Fan
1) Remove the upper cover (See 2.1.1.7) [2] [1]

2) Remove the printer controller PCB. (See
2.2.5)
3) Remove the NCU PCB. (if equipped
with fax functions; See 2.2.6)
4) Remove the modular jack PCB. (if
equipped with fax functions; See 2.2.7)
plate [2].
[1]
F05-201-22

image processor PCB base [4]. [3]
[4]
F05-201-23

7) Disconnect the connector [5]. [5] [6] [8]

fan unit [7].
fan [9].
[7]
[6] [8]
F05-201-24
When mounting the fan,

pay attention to the direc-
tion of its current.
F05-201-25

2.1.6 Removing the Reader Unit Slide Detecting Switch

2) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the [2]
reader unit slide detecting switch [2].
[1]
F05-201-26

2.2 PCBs
2.2.1 Removing the Image Processor PCB
1) Remove the rear cover. (See 2.1.1.1) [2] [2] [2]

2) Remove the printer controller PCB.(See
2.2.5)
3) Disconnect all connectors from the im-
age processor PCB [1].
image processor PCB [1].
[2] [2]
F05-202-01
2.2.2 Removing the Analog Processor PCB
1) Remove the copyboard glass. (See [3] [2]

2.1.3)
2) Move the contact sensor to the center.
3) Free the hook [1], and detach the cover
[2]. [1]
grounding plate [5].
[5]
[4]
F05-202-02

6) Slide the reader unit. [7] [6]

7) Remove the screw [6] from under the
reader unit.
8) Remove the 2 screws [7] from under the
reader unit, and detach the cover [8].
[8]
F05-202-03
9) Remove the grounding plate [9], and de-

tach the analog processor PCB unit [10].
[9] [10]
F05-202-04

10) Disconnect the connector [11], and re- [11]

move the 2 screws [12].
[12]
F05-202-05
11) Remove the cover [13], and detach the

analog processor PCB [14].
[14] [13]
F05-202-06

2.2.3 Removing the Sensor PCB
1) Remove the ADF (copyboard cover). [1] [2]

(ADF; See 2.8.1.1)
2) Remove the copyboard glass. (See
2.1.3)
3) Move the contact sensor to the center.
left upper cover [2].
F05-202-07
5) Remove the sensor flag [3] and the [7]

spring [4].
6) Disconnect the connector [5]. [4]
[3]
sensor PCB [7].
[5]
[6]
F05-202-08

2.2.4 Removing the DC Controller PCB/Power Supply PCB
1) Remove the rear cover. (See 2.1.1.1) [1]

2) Remove the delivery cover. (See 2.1.1.4)
3) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] used to
connect the image processor PCB and
the power supply unit.
4) Disconnect the connector [2] used to
connect the NCU PCB and the power
supply unit.
5) Disconnect the connector [3], and free
the harness [4] from the harness guide
[5].
[3] [4] [5] [4] [2]

F05-202-09
6) Disconnect the 3 connectors [6]. [6]
[6] [6]
F05-202-10

7) Remove the ADF (copyboard cover).

(ADF: See 2.8.1.1)
9) Place the machine so that its pickup side
is at the bottom.
F05-202-11

bottom plate [8].
[8]
[7]
F05-202-12


cassette rear cover [10].
[10]
[9]
F05-202-13
12) Free the harness [11] from the harness

guide [12].
the power supply unit [14].
[13]
[13] [12] [14]

[12]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[11]
[12]
[13]
F05-202-14

14) Disconnect the 3 connectors [15]. [19] [18]

[15]
DC controller PCB [17]. [18]
power supply PCB [19].
[18]
[16]
[16]
[17]
F05-202-15
When mounting the power

supply unit, be sure not to
leave out the sensor flag
[20] of the LGL paper sen-
sor from the rear of the sen-
sor plate [21]. [21]
[20]
F05-202-16

2.2.5 Removing the Printer Controller PCB

2) Disconnect the connector [1].
printer controller PCB [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
F05-202-17
2.2.6 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions)

2) Disconnect all connectors form the
NCU PCB.
NCU PCB [1].
[1]
[2]
F05-202-18

2.2.7 Removing the Modular Jack PCB
1) Remove the rear cover. (See 2.1.1.1)

modular jack PCB [3]. [3]
[1]
[2]
F05-202-19

2.3 Original Reading/Processing System

2.3.1 Removing the Contact Sensor
1) Remove the copyboard glass. (See

[1] [1]
2.1.3)
2) Remove the 2 spacer [1].
F05-203-01
3) Shift up the contact sensor [2], and dis-

connect the connector [3].
4) Remove the contact sensor [2].
[3] [2]
F05-203-02

2.3.2 Removing the Reader Motor Drive Unit
1) Remove the copyboard glass. (See [1]

2.1.3)
2) Free the contact sensor [1] from the
drive belt [2].
[2]
F05-203-03
3) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, remove

the cover [3], and remove the screw [4].
[3]
[4]
F05-203-04

4) Slide the reader unit to the left. [5] [9]

2 grounding plates [6]. [6]
6) Disconnect the connector [7]. [5]

7) While paying attention to the rib [8], lift
the rear motor drive unit [9] toward the [7]
right to detach. [6]
[5]
[8]
F05-203-05

2.3.3 Removing the Reader Unit

(ADF; See 2.8.1.1)
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and re-
move the harness retainer [2].
[1]
F05-203-06
4) Remove the control panel. (See 2.1.2) [4]

2 reader stoppers [4].
[3]
F05-203-07

6) Slide the reader unit [5] as shown, and

detach the reader unit [5] from the front
side.
[5]
F05-203-08

2.4 Laser Exposure System

2.4.1 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
The laser scanner unit can-

not be adjusted in the field.
Do not disassemble it.

[1]
F05-204-01
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2]. [2] [3] [4]

[3]
plate [4].
[2]
F05-204-02


laser scanner unit [6].
[5] [5]
F05-204-03

2.5 Image Formation System

2.5.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller
1) Slide the reader unit, and open the car- [1] [1]
tridge cover.
transfer charging roller [2].
[2]
F05-205-01

2.6 Pickup/Feeding System

2.6.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller

(ADF; See 2.8.1.1)
is at the bottom.
F05-206-01

bottom plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F05-206-02

5) Remove the spring [3], and detach the

[4]
cassette pickup roller unit [4]. [3]
F05-206-03
6) Free the hook [5], and detach the cas-

sette pickup roller [6].
[5]
[6]
F05-206-04

2.6.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid

2.1.1)
(ADF; See 2.8.1.1)
is at the bottom.
F05-206-05

bottom plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F05-206-06


cassette rear cover [4].
[4]
[3]
F05-206-07
7) Free the harness [5] from the harness [6]

guide [6]. [6]
8) Remove the screw [7], and detach the [7]
cassette pickup solenoid [8].
[5] [8]
F05-206-08

2.6.3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (upper)
1) Remove the right cover. (See 2.1.1.2) [2]

2) Remove the 4 ribs [1].
3) Remove the 2 springs [2], and slide the
manual feed tray (upper) [3] to detach.
[1] [3] [1]

F05-206-09
2.6.4 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower)
1) Remove the right cover. (See 2.1.1.2)

2) Remove the 2 ribs [1], and slide the
manual feed tray (lower) [2] to detach.
[1] [1]
[2]
F05-206-10

2.6.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller

2) Free the 2 hooks [1], and slide the 2
manual feed pickup roller retainers [2]
to the left and right.
[1] [2] [1]
F05-206-11
3) Free the hook [3], and slide the manual

feed pickup roller [4] to the right to de-
tach.
[4] [3]
F05-206-12

2.6.6 Removing the Separation Pad
1) Remove the manual feed tray (upper).

(See 2.6.3)
2) Remove the manual feed tray (lower).
(See 2.6.4)
3) Open the right door.
separation pad [2].
[2] [1]
F05-206-13
2.6.7 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid/Manual Feed Tray

Paper Sensor
1) Remove the main motor unit. (See [2]

2.1.4)
manual feed pickup solenoid [2]. [1]
manual feed tray paper sensor [4].
[4]
[3]
F05-206-14

2.6.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller

3) Slide the vertical path roller [1] to the
front to detach.
[1]
F05-206-15
2.6.9 Removing the Registration Roller Unit

2.2.1)
2) Remove the plastic film [1]. [1]
F05-206-16

3) Using long nose pliers or the like, pick [2]

the hook [2], and detach the registration
roller gear [3].
When removing the gear,

be sure to take care not to
break the claw.
[3]
F05-206-17
4) Slide the reader unit, and open the car- [5]

tridge cover.
registration roller unit [5].
[4] [4]
F05-206-18

2.7 Fixing System

2.7.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly
1) Remove the reader unit. (See 2.3.3) [1]

2) Remove the delivery upper cover/rear
cover. (See 2.1.1.5)
[1] [1]
F05-207-01

fixing assembly [3].
To remove the screw [2]

used to secure the fixing
Memo
assembly in place, try re-
moving the screws from
above the upper cover using
a long screwdriver (i.e.,
make use of the opening
above the screws to facili-
tate the work).
[3]
[2] [2]
F05-207-02

When mounting the fixing

assembly, be sure to engage
the gear of the fixing as-
sembly and the gear on the
main motor side by shifting
up the lever as shown.
F05-207-03

2.7.2 Removing the Fixing Film Unit/Fixing Pressure Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly. (See 2.7.1) [1]

2) Remove the fixing upper cover [1]
3) Remove the 2 screws [2].
4) Remove the 2 hooks [3], and detach the
plate [4]. [3]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F05-207-04
5) Remove the 2 ribs [5], and detach the

[6] [5]
delivery roll unit [6].
[5]
F05-207-05

6) Free the harness [7] from the harness [9] [10]

guide [8], and detach the fixing film unit
[9].
7) Remove the fixing pressure roller [10].
[8]
[7] [8]
F05-207-06
2.7.3 Removing the Delivery Sensor

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (See 2.7.1) [1] [3]
3) Free the 2 hooks [2], and detach the de-
livery sensor [3].
[2]
F05-207-07

2.8 ADF System (if equipped with ADF functions)

2.8.1 Externals/Auxiliary Control System
2.8.1.1 Removing the ADF
1) Remove the rear cover. (See 2.1.1.1)

ADF harness cover [2].
[1] [2]
F05-208-01
4) Remove the harness retainer [3]. [3]

5) Remove the screw [4], and disconnect
the connector [5].
[4] [5]
F05-208-02

6) Using a flat-blade screwdriver or the

like, remove the 2 covers [6]; then, us-
ing long nose pliers or the like, remove
the 2 pins [7].
[7]
[6]
F05-208-03
7) Return the reader unit to its initial posi- [9]

tion.
8) Open the ADF.
9) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, remove
the cover [8].
10) Detach the ADF [9] from the host ma-
chine.
[8]
F05-208-04
Take care so that no part
will become trapped by har-
ness of the ADF.

2.8.1.2 Removing the ADF Drive Unit
1) Remove the ADF from the host ma- [2]

[1]
chine. (See 2.8.1.1)
2) Holding the tab [1], detach the white
plate [2].
F05-208-05
3) Remove the 4 screws [3], and detach the [3] [4]

ADF drive unit [4].
[3]
[3]
F05-208-06

2.8.1.3 Removing the ADF Motor Unit
1) Remove the white roller. (See 2.8.3.1) [1] [4] [3] [5]
3) Remove the E-ring [2] and the bushing
[4]
[3].
ADF motor unit [5].
The ADF motor is posi-

tioned using a special tool
and, therefore, cannot be
adjusted in the field. Do not
remove the ADF motor
from the motor base. [2] [1]
F05-208-07

2.8.1.4 Removing the Slide Guide (front, rear)
1) Open the ADF. [2]

2) Pick the tab [1], and detach the white
plate [2].
[1]
F05-208-08
3) Remove the screw [3], slide plate [4], [6]

and gear [5]; then, detach the slide guide
(front, rear) [6].
[3] [4] [5]
F05-208-09

2.8.1.5 Mounting the Slide Guide (front, rear)
1) Mount the gear [3] while trying to

[1]
match the 2 cut-offs [1] and the marking
[2] on the slide guide (front, rear).
[2] [2]
[3]
F05-208-10
2) While holding down the gear to keep it

in place, mount the slide plate [4] and
tighten the screw [5] to secure the plate
in place.
[5] [4]
F05-208-11
3) Adjust the left/right registration. (See

1.2.2.1 of Chapter 7.)

2.8.2 Pickup System

2.8.2.1 Removing the Separation Roller Unit
1) Remove the ADF motor unit. (See

2.8.1.3) [3]
2) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], bush-
ing[3], and pin [4].
[4]
[1] [2]
F05-208-12
3) Remove the spring [5], screw [6], and [8] [9] [11] [7] [6]
plate [7].
4) Remove the E-ring [8], gear [9], belt
[10], and bushing [11].
[10]
[5]
F05-208-13

5) Remove the 2 springs [12], and slide the

shaft [13] to detach the open/close cover [14] [13]
unit [14].
[12]
F05-208-14

separation roller unit [16].
[16]
[15]
F05-208-15

2.8.2.2 Removing the Original Pickup roller/Original Separation roller
1) Remove the separation roller unit. (See [1]

2.8.2.1)
original pickup roller [2].
original separation roller [4]. [1]
[3]
[4]
[3]
F05-208-16
2.8.2.3 Removing the Original Sensor/Registration Sensor
1) Remove the ADF motor unit. (See [1] [3]

2.8.1.3)
original sensor [2].
3) Free the 2 hooks [3], and detach the reg-
istration sensor [4].
[2] [4]
F05-308-17

2.8.2.4 Removing the Original Separation Pad
1) Open the ADF. [2]

2) Hold the tab, and detach the white
plate[2].
[1]
F05-208-18
3) Remove the spring [3], and detach the [4]

original separation pad [4].
[3]
F05-208-19

2.8.2.5 Removing the ADF Registration Roller
1) Remove the ADF drive unit. (See [2]

2.8.1.2)
2) Remove the E-ring [1], and bushing [2].
[1]
F05-208-20
3) Remove the spring [3] and the screw [5]

[4], and detach the plate [5].
[4]
[3]
F05-208-21

4) Remove the E-ring [6], gear [7], bush-

ing [8], pin [9], and 2 belts [10].
5) Remove the ADF registration roller
[11].
[11]
[10] [9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
F05-208-22

2.8.3 Feeding System

2.8.3.1 Removing the White Roller

2.8.1.2)
2) Remove the spring [1] and the hook [2].
[1]
F05-208-23
3) Remove the spring [3] and the hook [4], [4] [3]
and detach the white roller [5].
[5]
F05-208-24

2.8.3.2 Removing the Feeding Outside Guide
1) Remove the ADF drive unit. (See [2] [1] [3]

2.8.1.2)
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and de-
tach the grounding plate [2].
3) Remove the static eliminator [3] as
much as shown.
[3]
F05-208-25

feeding outside guide [5].
[4]
F05-208-26

2.8.3.3 Removing the Feed Roll
1) Remove the feeding outside guide. (See [1]

2.8.3.2)
feed roll [2]. [1]
[2]
F05-208-27

2.8.3.4 Removing the Original Feed Roller
1) Remove the delivery stacking tray. (See

2.8.4.1)
2) Remove the 2 E-rings [1].
[1]
[1]
F05-208-28
3) Slide the original feed roller [2] to the [2]

left, and remove the pin [3], gear [4],
and bushing [5]; then, detach the origi-
nal feed roller [2].
[3] [4] [5]

F05-208-29

2.8.4 Delivery System

2.8.4.1 Removing the Delivery Stacking Tray/Original Delivery Roller
1) Remove the feeding outside guide. (See

[4]
2.8.3.2)
2) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], pin [3], [3]
and bushing [4].
[2]
[1]
F05-208-30
3) Remove the 2 screws [5], and free the 2

hooks [6]. [7] [8]
4) Remove the delivery stacking tray [7],
and detach the original delivery roller
[8].
[6]
[6]
[5]
F05-208-31

2.8.4.2 Removing the Original Delivery Sensor

2.8.1.2)
original delivery sensor [3].
[3] [1]
F05-208-32

CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

1 Periodically Replaced Parts

The machine does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
2 Durables
The machine does not have durables that require replacement once or more during the life
of the product because of wear or damage.
3 Scheduled Servicing Chart

The machine does not have items (parts or durables) that require scheduled servicing. To
help prolong the life of the product and its parts, it is recommended that the following be
performed at time of a service visit.
As of December 2001
Work Procedure
1. Question key person in charge, and obtain a general idea of the issue.
2. Make repairs of any faults.
3. Make test copies, and check the output for the following:
(1) image density against standards, (2) soiling of the background,
(3) clarity of characters, (4) margin, (5) fixing, faulty registration, soiling of the
back of the page.
Standards for Margin (single-sided)
Leading edge: 3.0 ± 2.0 mm
Left/right edge: 2.5 ± 1.5 mm
4. Clean the parts: As needed, remove the cartridge before starting the work. (See 4.2 of
Chapter 6)
5. Make test copies.
6. Clean up the area around the machine.

4 Cleaning
4.1 Cleaning by the User (machine)
The user is expected to perform the following so that the machine may be used in its best
condition at all times.
4.1.1 Cleaning the Fixing Pressure Roller

If the faces or the backs of printed sheets show soiling in the form of black dots, clean the
fixing pressure roller as follows:
1) Place an A4 or larger sheet of plain paper in the manual feed tray.

2) Press the Additional Functions key, and hold down the Right Arrow key or the Left Ar-
row key until the LCD indicates ‘6. ADJUST/CLEAN’.
4) Check to make sure that the LCD indicates ‘1. ROLLER CLEANING’, and press the
OK key. In response, the machine will start cleaning the fixing pressure roller.
It takes about 3 min before the paper is delivered to the delivery tray after
the cleaning of the fixing pressure roller is started.
Memo
4.1.2 Other Cleaning

If images tend to be soiled, advise the user to clean the following as needed.
No. Part Instructions

1 Copyboard glass Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well);
then, dry wipe it.
2 Copyboard glass retainer Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well);
then, dry wipe it.
3 Vertical side plate Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well);
then, dry wipe it.
4 White plate Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well);
then, dry wipe it.
T06-401-01

4.2 Cleaning by the User (ADF)

4.2.1 Cleaning the White Roller
If the backs of originals tend to become soiled, clean the white roller as follows:
1) Open the ADF, and clean the bottom of the white roller with a cloth moistened with wa-
ter (and wrung well). If the dirt is excessive, use alcohol with lint-free paper. Be sure to
dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper thereafter.
2) Press the Additional Functions key, and hold down the Right Arrow or Left Arrow key
until the LCD indicates ‘6. ADJUST/CLEAN’.
4) Hold down the Right Arrow key or the Left Arrow key until the LCD indicates ‘2.
CLEAN ADF ROLLER’.
6) When the LCD indicates ‘START CLEAN : [SET]’, press the OK key. In response, the
white roller makes a 120° turn.
7) Wipe the bottom of the white roller with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well);
then, dry wipe it.
8) Repeat steps 6) and 7) to clean the entire surface of the white roller.
9) Press the Stop key to end.
4.2.2 Other Cleaning

If images tend to become soiled, advise the user to clean the following as needed.
No. Part Instructions

1 White plate Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well);
then, dry wipe it.
T06-402-01

4.3 Cleaning at Time of a Service Visit (machine)

At time of a service visit, clean the items described in 4.1 “Cleaning by the User (ma-
chine)”; then, perform the following as needed:
Do not clean the photosensitive drum.
4.3.1 Selfoc Lens Array of the Contact Sensor
1. If the face of the light guide assembly becomes soiled or scratched, its
optical characteristics will be affected. Do not touch the light guide as-
sembly.
2. The contact sensor is vulnerable to static charges. Be sure to provide
measures against static damage before touching it.
3. Be sure to fit back the spacer after the cleaning work; otherwise, the
contact sensor may not work properly.
Lightly remove any dirt with a dry, soft cloth.
Light guide
assembly
(translucent)
Spacer
Selfoc lens array

(black)
Spacer
F06-403-01

4.3.2 Cassette Pickup Roller

Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). If the dirt is excessive, use
alcohol with lint-free paper thereafter, be sure to dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper.
4.3.3 Manual Feed Pickup Roller

Dry wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). If the dirt is excessive,
use alcohol with lint-free paper thereafter, be sure to dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free pa-
per.
4.3.4 Separation Pad

Dry wipe it with lint-free paper.
4.3.5 Registration Roller

alcohol with lint-free paper thereafter, use a cloth or lint-free paper.
4.3.6 Transfer Guide

Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well) thereafter, dry wipe it with a
cloth or lint-free paper.
4.3.7 Transfer Charging Roller

As a rule, do not touch or clean it. However, if cleaning proves necessary as when the
cause of an image fault is the transfer roller, clean it while taking care not to handle the
roller or not to subject it to solvent or oils.
Use lint-free paper and dry wipe it. Do not use water or solvent. During cleaning, take
care not to impose force on the rubber area of the transfer charging roller.
4.3.8 Separation Static Eliminator

Clean it with a blower brush.
4.3.9 Paper Path

Dry wipe it with lint-free paper.
4.3.10 Fixing Inlet Guide

Use alcohol with a soft cloth.
4.3.11 Fixing Pressure Roller

If dirt cannot be removed by executing fixing pressure roller cleaning from the Additional
Functions menu, use alcohol and a soft cloth.

4.3.12 Delivery Roller

alcohol and lint-free paper thereafter, dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper.
4.3.13 Back of Copyboard Glass (Back of Shading Plate)

Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry wipe it with a cloth
or lint-free paper.
Back of copyboard glass White pate

(back of shading plate)
Copyboard glass
Copyboard glass
retainer
Copyboard glass retainer
Vertical
side plate Manual feed
Contact sensor pickup roller
Delivery roller
Separation pad
Fixing
pressure roller
Fixing inlet guide Separation Transfer Vertical path roller

Paper path static Transfer guide
eliminator Registration roller
charging Cassette
roller pickup roller
F06-403-02

4.4 Cleaning at Time of a Service Visit (ADF)

At time of a service visit, clean the items described in 4.2 “Cleaning by the User (ADF)”;
then, perform the following as needed:
4.4.1 Original Pickup Roller

Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). If dirt is excessive, use alco-
hol with lint-free paper thereafter, dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper.
4.4.2 Original Separation Roller

Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). if the dirt is excessive, use
alcohol with lint-free paper thereafter, dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper.
4.4.3 Original Separation Pad

4.4.4 ADF Registration Roller

4.4.5 Original Feed Roller

4.4.6 Original Delivery Roller


4.4.7 Copyboard Glass (Original Reading Area)

Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry wipe it with a cloth
or lint-free paper.
Original pickup roller

Original separation roller Original
delivery roller
Original
feed roller
Original
White pate separation pad White roller Copyboard glass
(original reading area)
ADF registration roller
F06-404-01

CHAPTER 7
TROUBLESHOOTING

1 Standards and Adjustments

1.1 Checking Against the Standards
Check the machine against the standards as follows:
1.1.1 Checking the Pressure (nip) of the Fixing Pressure Roller

A fixing fault can occur if the nip of the fixing assembly is not correct. The machine is
not equipped with a mechanism to adjust the nip; if a fixing fault occurs, be sure to check
the nip as follows, and replace the fixing assembly if it is not as indicated:
1) Execute ‘PRINT test’ under ‘test mode’ in service mode to make a solid black copy on
A4 or LTR paper. (See 3.21.5 of Chapter 2.)
2) With the black side facing down, place the solid black copy in the manual feed tray and
make a copy using manual feed tray.
3) Turn off the power as soon as the leading edge of the paper appears in the delivery tray,
and leave the machine alone for about 10 sec.
4) Take out the cartridge, and remove the paper from the pickup side as if it was a jam.
5) Measure the width of the area of glossy toner on the paper, and see that it is as indicated
in T07-101-01.
<Using A4 Paper>
297mm
10mm
a
95mm
210mm
Feeding direction b
95mm
c
10mm
Solid black area Glossy area
F07-101-01

<Using LTR Paper>

279mm
10mm
a
98mm
216mm
Feeding direction b
98mm
c
10mm
Solid black area Glossy area
F07-101-02
Dimension
a 5.5±0.5 mm
|c-a| 0.5 mm or less

|b-a| 0.5 mm or less
|b-c| 0.5 mm or less
T07-101-01

1.2 Making Adjustments

1.2.1 Making Adjustments When Replacing Major Parts
You need to make the following adjustments whenever you have replaced the machine’s
major parts.
Be sure to make the appropriate adjustments if you have replaced a specific

major part.
Part replaced Item of adjustment

Image processor PCB all adjustments, including ADF adjustment
Contact sensor contact sensor LED intensity auto adjustment
To replace the image processor PCB, be sure to work according to the in-
structions given for the replacement of the image processor PCB (See 1.4.1
of Chapter 7).

1.2.2 Preparing a Test Sheet for Adjustment

You will need to prepare a test sheet as follows for adjustments (except contact sensor
LED intensity auto adjustment); refer to F07-102-01 and F07-102-02 for the specifics:
Preparing a Test Sheet: On a sheet of A4 or LTR paper, draw straight lines as indicated:
<Using A4 Paper>
297mm
10mm 10mm
10mm
(feeding direction)
210mm
10mm
10mm
Draw straight lines.

F07-102-01
<Using LTR Paper>
279mm
10mm 10mm
10mm
(feeding direction)
216mm
10mm
10mm
Draw straight lines.

F07-102-02

1.2.3 Adjusting the Mechanical Systems

The machine’s mechanical systems do not require adjustments.
1.2.4 Adjusting the Electrical Systems

1.2.4.1 Contact Sensor LED Intensity Auto Adjustment
Before starting adjustment, verify that there is nothing on the copyboard

glass. Also verify that the ADF (copyboard cover) is securely closed.
Execute auto adjustment of the contact sensor LED intensity as follows:

1) Press the Additional Functions key and the # key to start service mode.
2) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that ‘TEST MODE’ is indicated.
4) Press ‘2’ on the keypad so that ‘TEST MODE’ is indicated.
5) Press ‘7’ on the keypad to clear the CCD parameter.
6) Press the Stop key to return to ‘TEST MODE’.
7) Press ‘2’ on the keypad so that ‘2: CCD TEST’ is indicated.
8) Press ‘8’ on the keypad so that the machine starts contact sensor LED intensity auto ad-
justment.
9) End the work when the LCD indicates ‘OK’; if it indicates ‘NG’, on the other hand,
start over.
10) Press the Stop key and the Additional Functions key (to end TEST MODE).

1.2.4.2 Leading Edge Read Start Position Adjustment

Adjust the leading edge read start position for book mode as follows:
1) Make a copy of the test sheet in book mode on paper of the same size in Direct. (See
1.2.2 of Chapter 7.)
2) Measure the length of L on the copy (i.e., the length obtained by subtracting the leading
edge margin from the line found 10 mm from the leading edge; it must be 7 ± 0.5 mm).
Leading edge margin

L
(feeding direction)
Copy of the test sheet
F07-102-03
4) Press the left/Right Arrow key so that ‘#6 SCANNER’ is indicated.
6) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that ‘7: CCD’ is indicated.
8) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that the 2nd row of the LCD indicates ‘023:’.
9) Enter an appropriate correction value using the Left/Right Arrow key so that the length
of L measured in step 2 is 7 mm. (An increase by ‘1’ will decrease the length of L by
about 0.1 mm.)
11) Press the Stop key (to end SCANNER).
12) Make a copy of the test sheet in book mode on paper of the same size in Direct; then,
check to make sure that the length of L is as indicated.
13) End the work if the length of L is as indicated; otherwise, start over with step 2).

1.2.4.3 Left/Right Edge Read Start Position Adjustment

Adjust the left/right edge read start position for book mode as follows:
1) If LTR paper is available, prepare a test sheet using LTR paper. (See 1.2.2 of Chapter 7.)
If no LTR paper is available, cut a larger sheet of paper so that its width is 216 mm;
then, prepare a test sheet as instructed in 1.2.2, making sure that the width is 216 mm; as
for its length, make sure that it fits the copyboard glass.
2) Make a copy of the sheet in book mode on paper of the same size to a reduction ratio of
80%.
3) Measure the length of b-a of the copy, and check to make sure that it is as indicated. (It
must be 0 ± 0.4 mm.)
(feeding direction)

b
F07-102-04
5) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that ‘#6 SCANNER’ is indicated.
10) Enter an appropriate correction value on the keypad so that the length of b-a measured
in step 2) is as indicated. (An increase by ‘1’ will decrease the length of b by about 0.03
mm while increasing the length of a by about 0.03 mm.)
13) Make a copy of the test sheet in book mode on paper of the same size; then, check to
make sure that the length of L on the copy is as indicated.

1.3 Making Adjustments (ADF)

1.3.1 Items of Adjustment and Sequence of Work
The ADF must be adjusted for the following items and in the following sequence of work:
1. If you have replaced major parts of the ADF, you must always execute
the following: registration arch auto adjustment, original read position
adjustment. Then, check to make sure that the settings of other items of
adjustment are as indicated; if not, make adjustments starting with the
preceding item of adjustment.
2. Each item of adjustment affects the subsequent items of adjustment. If
you have made adjustments, therefore, be sure to check that the setting
of the item of adjustment that follows is also as indicated; if not, be sure
to start over with the preceding item.
Sequence Item of adjustment

1 registration arch auto adjustment
2 skew removal
3 original read position adjustment
4 original feed speed adjustment
5 leading edge read start position adjustment
6 trailing edge read end position adjustment
7 left/right registration adjustment
1.3.2 Preparing a Test Sheet for Adjustment

When making adjustments (except registration arch auto adjustment and original read po-
sition adjustment) for the ADF, you will need a test sheet like the one used for the copier.
Prepare a test sheet by referring to the instructions given under 1.2.2 of Chapter 7.

1.3.3 Adjusting the Mechanical Systems

1.3.3.1 Removing the Skew
Make a copy of the test sheet using the ADF in Direct, and make sure that the skew is as
indicated (T07-103-01). (See 1.2.2 of Chapter 7.)
a
(feeding direction)
b Copy of the test sheet
F07-103-01
Dimension (using A4) Dimension (using LTR)

b-a 0 ± 1.3 mm 0 ± 1.3 mm
T07-103-01
1) Open the ADF.
2) Loosen the 3 screws [1], and move the left hinge up and down so that the skew will be
as indicated by referring to the index graduated at 1-mm intervals.
[1]
F07-103-02

A shift of the ADF upward by 1 mm will increase the registration along the
left bottom of the paper by about 0.5 mm.
Memo
3) Place A4 (LTR) paper in the cassette or the manual feed tray.

4) Open the ADF, and place an A5 (STMTR) original on the copyboard glass.
5) Close the ADF, and make a copy in Direct.
6) Check the copy image, and check to make sure that the area outside the image is free of
fogging.
7) If fogging is found, the position of the white sheet may be wrong; check its positioning.
If no fault is found, try skew removal once again.
1.3.3.2 Left/Right Registration Adjustment

Using the ADF, make a copy of the sheet in Direct, and check to make sure the left/right
registration is 10 ± 1 mm. (See 1.2.2 of Chapter 7.)
10±1mm
(feeding direction)
F07-103-03
1) Pick the tab [1], and detach the white plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F07-103-04

2) Loosen the screw [3], and move the slide guide to the front/rear with reference to the in-
dex graduated at 1-mm intervals until the registration is as indicated.
[3]
F07-103-05
A shift of the slide guide up by 1 mm will increase the registration on the

right (top of paper) by 1 mm.
Memo
Do not remove the screw [3]; otherwise, you must work as instructed for
mounting of the slide guide. (See 2.8.1.5 of Chapter 5)

1.3.4 Adjusting the Electrical Systems

1.3.4.1 Registration Arch Auto Adjustment
Adjust the registration arch for the ADF registration roller as follows:
3) Press ‘6’ on the keypad so that ‘FACULTY TEST’ is indicated.
4) Press ‘4’ on the keypad so that ‘6-4 ADF’ is indicated.
5) Place 10 sheets of A4 paper in the ADF.
6) Press ‘8’ on the keypad so that the machine will start registration arch auto adjustment.
start over the adjustment.
8) Press the Stop key and then the Additional Functions key (to end TEST MODE).
1.3.4.2 Original Read Position Adjustment

Adjust the contact sensor original read position for ADF mode as follows:
Check to make sure that the ADF is fully closed before starting the work.
Moreover, check to be sure of the absence of any object on the copyboard
glass.
4) Press ‘2’ on the keypad so that ‘2: CCD TEST’ is indicated.
5) Press ‘3’ so that the machine starts original read position adjustment.
start over the adjustment.
7) Press the Stop key and the Additional Functions key (to end TEST MODE).

1.3.4.3 Original Speed Adjustment

Adjust the speed at which originals are moved for ADF mode as follows:
1) Make a copy of the test sheet in ADF mode on paper of the same size in Direct. (See
2) Measure the length “L” in the middle of the copy output. (It must be 277 ± 1 mm for
A4, 259 ± 1 mm for LTR.)
(feeding direction)
L
F07-103-06
9) Enter a appropriate correction value using the Left/Right Arrow key so that the length of
L measured in step 2) is as indicated. (An increase by ‘1’ will increase the length of L
by about 0.5 mm.)
12) Make a copy of the test sheet in ADF mode on paper of the same size in Direct; then,
check to make sure that the length of L of the copy is as indicated.

1.3.4.4 Leading Edge Read Start Position Adjustment

Adjust the leading edge start position for ADF mode as follows:
1) Make a copy of the test sheet in ADF mode on paper of the same size in Direct. (See
2) Measure the length of L on the copy (i.e., obtained by subtracting the leading edge mar-
gin from the position of the line found 10 mm from the leading edge; it must be 7 ± 0.5
mm).
Leading edge margin

L
(feeding direction)
F07-103-07
8) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that the 2nd row of the LCD indicates ‘024’.
9) Enter an appropriate correction value using the Left/Right Arrow key so that the length
of L measured in step 2) is 7 mm. (An increase of ‘1’ will increase the length of L by
about 0.1 mm.)
12) Make a copy of the test sheet in ADF mode on paper of the same size in Direct; then,
check to make sure that the length of L on the copy is as indicated.

1.3.4.5 Trailing Edge Read End Position Adjustment

To adjust the trailing edge margin for ADF mode, go through the following:
1) Make a copy of the test sheet prepared in 1.2.2 of Chapter 7 on LGL paper in Direct.
2) Measure the length “L” on the copy output. (standard: 8 ±0.5 mm)
L Trailing edge margin
(feeding direction)
F07-103-08
4) Press the Left/Right arrow key so that ‘#6 SCANNER’ is indicated.
6) Press the Left/Right arrow key so that ‘7: CCD’ is indicated.
8) Press the Left/Right arrow keys so that the 2nd row of the LCD indicates ‘025:’.
9) Enter a correction value using the Left /Right key so that the length of “L” measured in
step 2) is 8 mm (trailing edge margin of 2 mm; an increase by ‘1’ will decrease the
length of “L” by about 0.1 mm).
11) Press the Stop key (to leave ‘SCANNER’).
12) Make a copy of the Test Sheet in Direct on LGL paper and in ADF mode. Then, check
to make use that the length of “L” on the copy is as indicated.
13) If it is as indicated, end the work. Otherwise, start over with step 2).

1.4 When Replacing a Component

You will need to perform some additional work if you have replaced a component; go
through the following for the item of work and steps to take:
1.4.1 When Replacing the Image Processor PCB

Perform the following if you have replaced the image processor PCB:
1.4.1.1 Before Starting the Work

1) If the machine is equipped with fax functions, print out the following and all received
images: system data list, 1-touch/speed/group dial list, user data list, activity report, sys-
tem dump list.
2) Turn off the power.
Vanadium lithium
secondary battery
(BAT2)
Lithium battery Jumper plug

(BAT1) (JP1)
F07-104-01
When the jumper plug (JP1) is removed, all data in control memory will be
lost. Therefore, do not disconnect the jumper plug (JP1). The data stored in
the SRAM is as follows:
• user data (data set by the user by pressing the Register/OK key)
• service mode deta (data indicating service mode settings)
• control data (communications control record of most recent 20 communi-
cations, system dump record)

1.4.1.2 After Finishing the Work

1) Connect the jumper plug (JP1) of the image processor PCB (service part; one side of the
pin is disconnected; try connecting both its feet).
2) Turn on the power; then, when ‘DATA ERROR’ is indicated, press the OK key.
3) Enter the user data and the service mode data.
4) Make various adjustments for the electrical system of the machine. (See 1.2.4 of Chapter
7.)
5) If the machine is equipped with ADF functions, make various adjustments for the ADF.
(See 1.3 of Chapter 7.)
1.4.2 When Replacing the NCU PCB

To use this machine in Italy, the steps described below must be carried out when replacing
the NCU PCB.
1) Remove the short connector from connector J9 of the NCU PCB.
J9
Short connector
A
SW3
B A
SW1
B
F07-104-02
2) Install the removed short connector to connector J9 of the new NCU PCB.
Do not change the settings of SW1 and SW3 on the NCU PCB. Leave
them to the default settings as follows:
SW1 default: B
SW3 default: B

2.Troubleshooting
A fault that can occur in the machine may be one of the following three: an image fault, a
malfunction, a feeding fault.
If a fault occurs, make initial checks first; then, isolate the problem according to the
troubleshooting flow chart, and take appropriate action with the following in mind:
2.1 Making Initial Checks
1. If you are using a specific terminal of a connector to measure voltage, be

sure to check that the connector is not suffering from poor contact.
2. If you are handling a PCB or the contact sensor, be sure to touch a metal
portion of the machine before starting the work to avoid static damage.
3. The machine’s laser scanner unit cannot be adjusted in the field. Do not
disassemble it.
2.1.1 Site Environment

a. The power source must provide the rated voltage ±10%.
b. The site must be free of high temperature/humidity (not near a water faucet, water
boiler, humidifier), and must not be in a cold place, near a source of fire, or subject to
dust.
c. The site must be free of ammonium gas.
d. The site must be free of direct rays of the sun; otherwise, it must be provided with cur-
tains.
e. The site must be well ventilated.
f. The machine must be level.
g. If the machine is equipped with fax functions, it must remain powered day and night.
2.1.2 Checking the Cartridge

If the surface of the photosensitive drum has scratches, replace the cartridge.
2.1.3 Checking the Paper

a. Is the paper of a recommended type?
b. Is the paper moist? Try fresh paper out of package.
2.1.4 Others
When a machine is brought from a cold to warm place, its inside can start to develop con-
densation, leading to various problems; for example,
a. condensation in the charging roller system tends to cause electrical leakage.
b. condensation on the pickup/feed path tends to cause a feeding fault.
If condensation occurs, dry wipe the parts or leave the machine ON for 60 min.

2.2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart

After going through the initial checks, try to isolate the problem using the following flow
chart, and take appropriate action:
Initial Checks
No See the troubleshooting

Is power supplied? tables for malfunctions
(other than for service errors).
Yes
No Is a user or No See the troubleshooting

Does the machine
enter standby state? service error tables for malfunctions
indicated? (other than for service errors).
Yes
See the Reference
Guide/Fax Guide or
the troubleshooting tables
for malfunctions
(service errors).
Yes
No See the troubleshooting tables

Can a test print
for malfunctions
be made? (*1)
(other than for service errors).
Yes
Execute test printing.
Yes
See the troubleshooting
Does a jam occur?
tables for feeding faults.
No
Is the delivered No See the troubleshooting

paper normal? tables for feeding faults.
Yes
Is there an Yes See the troubleshooting

image fault? tables for faulty images.
No
See the Reference

Is a user or service Yes
Guide/Fax Guide or
error initiated? the troubleshooting tables
for malfunctions
No (service errors).
End.
(*2)
F07-202-01

*1: When executing test printing, be sure to select the source of paper used by the user
when the fault occurred.
*2: For malfunctions related to the ADF, see the descriptions of faults unique to machines
equipped with ADF functions. Likewise, if a malfunction occurs while printing from a
PC or a fax communication, see its respective section (those unique to printer functions
or those unique to fax functions).
2.3 Making Checks in Response to an Image Fault

When you have indicated an image fault using the troubleshooting flow chart, go through
the following before starting troubleshooting work that follows:
2.3.1 Checking the Originals Against the Symptom

Determine whether the fault is caused by the machine or the original:
a. The copy density is best set to index 5 ± 2.
b. Originals with a bluish background tend to cause poor contrast; e.g., blue sheet, receipts.
c. The density of the original affects its copies: e.g., a diazo copy original or an original
with a high transparency can produce output that can be mistaken for “foggy copies,”
while originals prepared in light pencil can produce output that can be mistaken for
“light” copies.
2.3.2 Copyboard Glass and White Sheet

If the copyboard glass or the white sheet is soiled, wipe it with a moist cloth and then dry
wipe it. If the dirt is excessive, use alcohol and lint-free paper. If there are scratches, replace
it.

3 Troubleshooting Image Faults

3.1 Troubleshooting Procedure for Image Faults
Before starting to investigate the cause of an image fault, be sure to find out wheather the
user is storing paper in the correct way and using paper of a recommended type. If the prob-
lem is corrected using such paper, advise the user accordingly.
Too light Too dark Foggy vertically Fuzzy, black

vertical lines
Foggy horizontally Fuzzy, black Black lines Black lines

horizontally lines (vertical) (horizontal)
White spots White lines White spots White lines

(vertical) (vertical) (horizontal) (horizontal)
Soiled face Soiled back Fixing fault Left/right

displacement
Blurry image Poor sharpness Blank Soiled blank

(out of focus)
Note:
Paper feed direction
F07-301-01

3.1.1 The output is too light.
Image density
1) Is the image density setting correct?
• In the case of copier functions: PRINT EXPOSURE of COMMON
SETTINGS and STANDARD EXPOSURE of COPY SETTINGS
on user mode menu.
• In the case of printer functions or fax functions, PRINT EXPO-
SURE of COMMON SETTINGS on user mode menu.
NO: Correct the image density setting.
Paper
2) Try paper fresh out of package (newly opened). Is the problem cor-
rected?
YES: 1. The paper may be moist. Advise the user on the correct method
of storing paper.
2. Advise the user that the use of non-recommended paper may
not bring about the best results.
General conditions
3) Execute ‘PRINT test’. Is the output image normal? (See 3.21.5 of
Chapter 2.)
YES: Go through steps 14) to 18).
NO: Go to step 4.
General conditions
4) Turn off the machine while an image is printing on the photosensi-
tive drum. Is the toner on the drum surface developed?
NO: Go through steps 5) to 10).
Cartridge
5) Take out the cartridge, and rock it lightly 5 to 6 times. Is the prob-
lem corrected?
YES: End.
High-voltage contact (between cartridge and high-voltage spring)
6) Is the high-voltage spring used to supply high voltage to the car-
tridge soiled? (Remove the cartridge to check.)
YES: Clean it.
High-voltage contact (between high-voltage spring and DC controller PCB; J205, J207)
7) Is the connection between the high-voltage spring and the DC con-
troller PCB (J205, J207) normal?
NO: Correct it. If it cannot be corrected, replace the faulty part.

Connector
8) Is the connection of the following connectors normal: J201 and
J204 on the DC controller PCB; J303, J304, J312, and J316 on the
image processor PCB; J3122 and J801 in the laser scanner unit?
NO: Connect them firmly. If a scratch is found in the flexible cable, re-
place it.
Cartridge
9) Try replacing the cartridge. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Laser scanner unit, DC controller PCB
10) Try replacing the laser scanner unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
Transfer guide
11) Measure the transfer guide and other metal portions. Is the resis-
tance 0 Ω
YES: Check the area around the toner guide for a piece of metal (e.g.,
screw).
High-voltage contact (between transfer charging roller and high-voltage spring)
12) Is the high-voltage spring used to supply high voltage to the trans-
fer charging roller soiled?
YES: Clean it.
High-Voltage Contact (high-voltage spring and DC controller PCB; J209), Transfer charging
roller
13) Is the connection between the high-voltage spring and DC control-
ler PCB (J209) normal?
YES: Replace the transfer charging roller.
NO: Correct it. If it cannot be corrected, replace the faulty part.
Selfoc lens array (contact sensor)
14) Clean the selfoc lens array of the contact sensor. Is the problem cor-
rected? (See 4.3.1 of Chapter 6.)
YES: End.
Contact sensor LED intensity auto adjustment
15) Execute contact sensor LED intensity auto adjustment. Is the prob-
lem corrected? (See 1.2.4.1 of Chapter 7.)
YES: End.
Connector
J503 on the analog processor PCB; J317 on the image processor
PCB; and J504 of the contact sensor?
NO: Connect them firmly. If the flexible cable has a scratch, replace it.

Contact sensor
17) Try replacing the contact sensor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Analog processor PCB, Image processor PCB
18) Try replacing the analog processor PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the image processor PCB.
3.1.2 The output is too dark.
Image density
1) Is the image density setting correct?
• In the case of copier functions: PRINT EXPOSURE of COMMON
SETTINGS and STANDARD EXPOSURE of COPY SETTINGS
on user mode menu.
• In the case of printer functions or fax functions, PRINT EXPO-
SURE of COMMON SETTINGS on user mode menu.
NO: Correct the image density setting.
General condition
Chapter 2.)
YES: Clean it.
troller PCB (J205, J207) normal?
YES: Correct it. If it cannot be corrected, replace the faulty part.
Connector
J204 on the DC controller PCB; J303, J304, J312, and J316 on the
image processor PCB; J3122 and J801 in the laser scanner unit?
Cartridge
YES: End.
YES: End.


8) Clean the selfoc lens array of the contact sensor. Is the problem cor-
rected? (See 4.3.1 of Chapter 6.)
YES: End.
YES: End.
Connector
PCB; J504 of the contact sensor?
Contact sensor
YES: End.
YES: End.
3.1.3 The output is foggy vertically.

3.1.4 The output has fuzzy, black vertical lines.
Transfer guide assembly, Cartridge

1) Clean the transfer guide assembly. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the cartridge.

3.1.5 The output is foggy horizontally.

3.1.6 The output has fuzzy, black horizontal lines.
General conditions
Chapter 2.)
NO: Go to step 2).
Transfer guide assembly, Cartridge
2) Clean the transfer guide assembly. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
3) Clean the selfoc lens array of the contact sensor. (See 4.3.1 of Chap-
ter 6.)
YES: End.
YES: End.
Connector
PCB; and J504 of the contact sensor?
Contact sensor
YES: End.
YES: End.

3.1.7 The output has black lines (vertical).

3.1.8 The output has black lines (horizontal).
Fixing inlet guide

1) Clean the fixing inlet guide. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Cartridge (photosensitive drum or primary charging roller), Fixing assembly
YES: End.
NO: Replace the fixing assembly.
3.1.9 The output has white spots (vertical).

3.1.10 The output has white lines (vertical).
General conditions
Chapter 2.)
YES: Go to step 4).
NO: Go through steps 2) through 3).
2) Is the transfer charging roller soiled?
YES: Clean it. If the problem is not corrected, replace it.
Cartridge, Fixing assembly
YES: End.
Contact sensor drive belt, Contact sensor drive rail
4) Is the contact sensor drive belt normal?
YES: Clean the surface of the contact sensor drive rail with alcohol;
thereafter, apply a small amount of lubricant.
NO: Replace the contact sensor drive belt.

3.1.11 The output has white spots (horizontal).

3.1.12 The output has white lines (horizontal).
Static eliminator
1) Is the static eliminator soiled?
YES: Clean it.
Back of copyboard glass (back of shading plate; dirt)
2) Try cleaning the back of the shading plate of the copyboard glass.
Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Shading position
3) Change the setting of No. 19 under ‘#6 SCANNER’ in service mode.
Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4) Is the transfer charging roller soiled?
YES: Clean it. If the problem is not corrected, replace it.
Cartridge, Fixing assembly
YES: End.

3.1.13 The output is soiled.
Rollers (manual feed pickup roller, registration roller, fixing film, delivery roller), Photosen-
sitive drum, Cartridge, Contact sensor
1) Is the problem at specific intervals?
YES: Identify the cause by referring to T07-301-01, and clean it. (If it is
the photosensitive drum, replace the cartridge.)
If the problem is not corrected, replace it.
NO: Check for drops of toner from the cartridge.
If the problem occurs only in copy images, clean the selfoc lens
array of the contact sensor.
Image Faults by Component
Component Diam- Image Type of image fault

eter*1 fault White Soiling Soiled Fixing Blurring Poor
interval*1 spot back fault sharp-
ness
Cassette pickup roller 38.0 - √
Manual feed pickup 32.0 - √ *2
roller
Vertical path roller 14.3 44.9 *2 √
Registration roller 13.9 43.8 *2 √
Primary charging roller 12.0 37.3 √
Developing cylinder 16.0 42.0 √ √
Photosensitive drum 30.0 93.3 √ √ √ √
Transfer charging roller 14.6 43.7 √ √ √ √
Fixing film 24.0 75.4 √ *2 √
Fixing pressure roller 20.4 64.1 *2 √ √
Delivery roller 12.4 39.0 √ *2
*1: Approximate; in mm.
*2: Can be caused by dirt from the roller.
T07-301-01

3.1.14 The back of the output is soiled.
Paper
1) Is the paper soiled?
YES: Replace the paper.
2) Execute fixing pressure roller cleaning. Is the problem correct? (See
YES: Advise the user to clean the fixing pressure roller periodically.
Transfer guide
3) Is the surface of the transfer guide soiled with toner?
YES: Clean it.
Static eliminator
4) Is the static eliminator soiled with toner?
YES: Clean it.
Rollers (cassette pickup roller, vertical path roller, registration roller, transfer charging roller,
fixing pressure roller), Paper path
5) Is the problem noted at specific internals?
YES: Isolate the cause by referring to T07-301-01, and clean it.
If the problem is not corrected, replace the part.
NO: Clean the paper path. If the problem cannot be corrected, replace
the part.

3.1.15 The output has a fixing fault.
Paper
1) Try paper fresh out of package (newly opened). Is the problem cor-
rected?
YES: 1. The paper may be moist. Advise the user on the correct method
of storing paper.
2. Advise the user that the use of non-recommended paper may not
bring about the best results in terms of fixing.

2) Execute fixing pressure roller cleaning. Is the problem corrected?
(See 4.1.1 of Chapter 6.)
YES: Advise the user to clean the fixing locking roller periodically.
Paper selection (for manual feed)
3) Is the setting of paper selection suited to the type of paper placed in
the manual feed tray?
NO: Correct the setting.
Connector
4) Is the connection of the connector J107 on the power supply PCB
normal?
NO: Connect it firmly.
5) Is the surface of the fixing pressure roller normal?
NO: Clean the fixing locking roller. If it has a scratch, replace it.
Fixing film unit
6) Try replacing the fixing film unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Fixing pressure roller (nip), Power supply PCB
7) Is the nip of the fixing pressure roller correct? (See 1.1 of Chapter
7.)
NO: Replace the fixing assembly. If the problem is not corrected after
replacement, replace the power supply PCB.

3.1.16 The output has left/right displacement.
Original
1) Is the original placed correctly?
NO: Place it correctly.
Paper
2) Is the paper curled appreciably?
YES: Replace the paper.
Stack
3) Is the amount of paper placed in the cassette more than allowed?
YES: Advise the user on the limit imposed on the amount of paper.
Left/right edge read start position adjustment, DC controller PCB
4) Execute left/right edge read start position adjustment. Is the prob-
YES: End.
3.1.17 The output has a blurry image.
General conditions
Chapter 2.)
YES: Go through steps 4) and 5).
NO: Go through steps 2) and 3).
Transfer charging roller, Photosensitive drum
2) Is the problem noted at specific intervals?
YES: Identify the cause by referring to T07-301-1, and replace it. (If the
photosensitive drum is the case, replace the cartridge.)
If the problem cannot be corrected, check its drive system (e.g.,
gears).
YES: End.
Contact sensor drive belt
Contact sensor drive rail, reader motor
5) Move the contact sensor slowly. Does it move smoothly?
YES: Replace the reader motor.
NO: Check the surface of the contact sensor drive rail for foreign mat-
ter; if there is any, remove it. If it is soiled, clean it with alcohol,
and then apply a small amount of lubricant.

3.1.18 The output has poor sharpness (out of focus).
General conditions
Chapter 2.)
YES: Go to step 5).
NO: Go through steps 2) and 5).
Sharpness setting
2) Change the setting of ‘SHARPNESS’ under ‘COPY SETTINGS’ on
the user mode menu. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
High-voltage contact (high-voltage spring and DC controller PCB; J205, J207, J209)
High-voltage contact (high-voltage spring; J205, J207, J209 on DC controller PCB)
4) Is the connection between the high-voltage spring and the connec-
tors (J205, J207, J209) on the DC controller PCB normal?
NO: Correct the connection. If the problem is not corrected, replace the
faulty part.
Cartridge (primary charging roller, developing cylinder, photosensitive drum), Transfer
charging roller, Contact sensor drive rail
5) Is the problem noted at specific intervals?
YES: Identify the cause by referring to T07-301-01, and replace it. (If it
is the primary charging roller, developing cylinder, or photosensi-
tive drum, replace the cartridge.)
ter; if there is any, remove it. If it is solenoid, clean it with alcohol,
and then apply a small amount of lubricant.

3.1.19 The output is blank.

General conditions
Chapter 2.)
NO: Go to step 2).
General condition
2) Turn off the power while an image is being printed on the photo-
sensitive drum. Is the toner image developed on the drum surface?
YES: Clean it.
4) Is the connection between the high-voltage spring and the connec-
tors (J205, J207) on the DC controller normal?
NO: Correct it. If the problem cannot be corrected, replace the faulty
part.
Connectors
5) Is the connection of the following connectors on the DC controller
PCB normal: J201 and J204 on the DC controller PCB; J303, J304,
J312, and J316 on the image processor PCB; J3122, and J801 of the
laser scanner unit?
Cartridge
YES: End.
YES: End.
Transfer guide
8) Measure the transfer guide and other metal areas. Is the resistance
0 Ω.
YES: Check the area around the transfer guide for pieces of metal (e.g.,
screw).
High-voltage contact (between transfer charging roller and high-voltage spring)
9) Is the high-voltage spring used to supply high voltage to the trans-
fer charging roller soiled?
YES: Clean it.

High-voltage contact (between high-voltage spring and DC controller PCB; J209), Transfer
charging roller
troller PCB (J209) normal?
YES: Replace the transfer charging roller.
NO: Correct it. If the problem cannot be corrected, replace the faulty
part.
YES: End.
Connector
PCB; J504 of the contact sensor.
Contact sensor
YES: End.
YES: End.

3.1.20 The output is solid black.
General conditions
Chapter 2.)
High voltage contact (between primary charging roller and high-voltage spring)
2) Is the high-voltage spring used to supply power to the cartridge
soiled? (Remove the cartridge to check.)
YES: Clean it.
High-voltage contact (high-voltage spring and DC controller PCB; J205)
NO: Correct it. If the problem cannot be corrected, replace the faulty part.
Cartridge, DC controller PCB
YES: End.
Contact sensor LED intensity auto adjustment adjustment
5) Execute contact sensor LED intensity auto adjustment adjustment.
Is the problem corrected? (See 1.2.4.1 of Chapter 7.)
YES: End.
Connector
6) Is the connection of the following controller normal: J501 and J503
on the analog processor PCB; J317 on the image processor PCB;
J504 of the contact sensor?
Contact sensor
YES: End.
YES: End.

4 Troubleshooting Malfunctions
4.1 Troubleshooting Malfunctions (service error)
E000
The error history indicates any of the following error codes 4 times: E001,
E002, E003.
Action 1) Clear the error.

Execute ‘#4 PRINTER RESET” under ‘#7 PRINTER’ in service mode to
clear the error.; then, turn back on the power.
E001
000 The main thermistor detects 230°C/446°F or higher for 1 sec or
more.
001 The sub thermistor detects 300°C/572°F or higher for 0.2 sec or
more.
Main cause The fixing film unit is faulty (thermistor short circuit). The power supply
PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Action 1. Malfunction
Turn off the power; wait for 10 min, and turn it on. Is the problem cor-
rected?
YES: End.
2. Fixing film unit
Check the connector (4-pin) of the thermistor for electrical continuity: 1-2
and 3-4. Is it 0 Ω?
YES: Replace the fixing film unit.
3. Power supply PCB, DC controller PCB
Try replacing the power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected?

E002
000 During printing, the main thermistor detects 0°C/32°F or lower for
1 sec or more continuously.
About 10 sec or later after power-on/start of printing, the main
thermistor detects less than 120°C/248°F for 1 sec or more con-
tinuously.
After power-on/start of printing, the reading of the main thermistor
does not reach the target value -15°C/-27°F or higher within 75
sec.
001 About 10 sec or later after the heater is supplied with power, the
sub thermistor detects less than 75°C/167°F for 2 sec or more con-
tinuously.
Main cause The fixing film unit is faulty (main thermistor fault, sub thermistor fault,
thermal fuse blow, fixing heater fault). The power supply PCB is faulty. The
DC controller PCB is faulty.
Action See the descriptions for E003.
E003
During printing, the main thermistor detects less than 120°C/248°F for 1
sec or more continuously.
Main cause The fixing film unit is faulty (main thermistor fault, thermal fuse blow, fix-
ing heater fault). The power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB
is faulty.
Action 1. Malfunction
Turn off the power; wait for 10 min, and turn on the power. Is the problem
corrected?
YES: End.
2. Wiring
Is the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the fixing film unit normal?
NO: Correct the wiring.
3. Fixing film unit
Try replacing the fixing film unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4. Power supply PCB, DC controller PCB
Try replacing the power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.

E100
About 1.5 sec after the scanner drive signal output, the BDI* signal is not
detected 3 times or more for 1.0 sec.
While the laser is ON, the BD signal cycle is not as indicated for 0.5 or
more continuously.
Main cause The laser driver/BD PCB is faulty (laser activation failure, BD detection
fault). The DC controller PCB is faulty. The image processor PCB is faulty.
Action 1. Laser scanner unit

Try replacing the laser scanner unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
2. DC controller PCB, Image processor PCB
Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
E110
The scanner fails to reach the target speed of rotation 10 sec after the laser
scanner motor reaches constant speed state.
Main cause The laser scanner motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Action 1. Laser scanner unit, DC controller PCB

Try replacing the laser scanner unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.

E805
While the fan is rotating, fan lock state is detected for 10 sec or more con-
tinuously.
Main cause The fan is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The image processor
PCB is faulty.
Action 1. Foreign matter

Is there any foreign matter that hinders the rotation of the heat discharge
fan?
YES: Remove the foreign matter.
2. Wiring, Connection
Are the wiring and connection (connectors) of the fan normal?
NO: Correct them.
3. Fan
Try replacing the fan. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4. DC controller PCB/Image processors PCB
Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.

4.2 Troubleshooting Malfunctions (other than service error)

4.2.1 Power is absent.
Power plug
1) Is the power plug connected to the power outlet?
Power cord
2) Is the power cord connected to the machine? Moreover, is the
power cord normal?
NO: Connect it. If it is faulty, replace it.
Source power
3) Is the rated voltage present at the power outlet?
YES: Replace the power supply PCB. If the fuse has blown, find and re-
move the cause.
NO: The problem is not of the machine. Advise the user.
4.2.2 The LCD fails to operate.
Connector
J402 on the control panel PCB; J315 on the image processor PCB;
J4020 on the LCD?
NO: Connector them firmly. If the flexible cable has a scratch, replace
it.
LCD
2) Try replacing the LCD. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Control panel PCB/Image processor PCB
3) Try replacing the control panel PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.

4.2.3 The contact sensor fails to move.
Contact sensor, Spacer of contact sensor

1) Are the contact sensor and the spacers of the contact sensor
mounted correctly?
NO: Mount them correctly.
Contact sensor drive belt
Contact sensor drive rail
3) Move the contact sensor slowly. Does it move smoothly?
ter, and remove any foreign matter. If it is soiled, clean it with alco-
hol, and apply a small amount of lubricant.
Connector
4) Is the connection between the connector J310 on the image proces-
sor PCB and the connector of the reader motor normal?
NO: Correct the connection.
Reader motor, Image processor PCB
5) Try replacing the reader motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.2.4 The contact sensor LED fails to go ON.
Connector
1) Is the connection of the following sensors normal: J501 and J503 on
the analog processor PCB; J317 on the image processor PCB; J504
on the contact sensors?
NO: Correct the connection. If the flexible cable has a scratch, replace
it.
Contact sensor
YES: End.
YES: End.

4.2.5 The speaker fails to generate sound.
Volume setting
1) Is the volume setting in user mode menu correct?
NO: Correct the setting.
Connector
2) Is the connection of the following connectors normal: J315 on the
image processor PCB; J401 and J404 on the control panel PCB?
it.
Speaker
3) Try replacing the speaker. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Control panel PCB, Image processor PCB
4) Replace the control panel PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.2.6 The message “INSTALL CARTRIDGE” fails to go OFF.
High-voltage contact (between machine and cartridge)

tridge soiled?
YES: Clean it.
High-voltage contact (between high-voltage spring and DC controller PCB; J205)
NO: Correct the connection. If the problem cannot be corrected, replace
the faulty part.
Cartridge, DC controller PCB
3) Replace the cartridge. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.

4.2.7 The message “SUPPLY REC. PAPER” fails to go OFF. (cassette)
Cassette
1) Is the cassette fitted correctly?
NO: Fit the cassette correctly.
Spring (holding plate)
2) Is the holding plate of the cassette in up position?
NO: Check the case holding plate, and correct if necessary. If damaged,
replace it.
Flag of cassette paper sensor (PS103)
3) Is the flag of the cassette paper sensor displaced or damaged?
YES: Correct it. If damaged, replace it.
4.2.8 The message “SUPPLY REC. PAPER” fails to go OFF. (manual feed
tray)
Flag of manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4)

1) Is the flag of the manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4) displaced or
damaged?
Connector
J308 on the image processor PCB; J204 on the DC controller PCB;
J3081 on the manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4)?
Manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4)
3) Try replacing the manual feed paper sensor (PS4). Is the problem
corrected?
YES: End.
DC controller PCB, Image processor PCB
4) Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.

4.2.9 The message “REC. PAPER JAM” fails to go OFF.
General conditions
1) Check to find out which of the following sensors is faulty. (See 6.1
of Chapter 7.)
• cassette paper sensor (PS103)
• manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4)
• delivery sensor (PS3)
• paper leading edge sensor (PS102)
Sensor flag
2) Is the flag of the sensor identified in step 1) damaged or displaced?
Connector
3) Is the connection between the connector for the sensor identified in
step 1) and the image processor PCB, DC controller PCB, and
power supply PCB normal?
• In the case of the manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4), J303 and
J308 of the image processor PCB and J204 of the DC controller
PCB.
• In the case of the delivery sensor (PS3), J106 and J109 of the power
supply PCB and J202 of the DC controller PCB.
Sensor
4) If the faulty sensor is any of the following, try replacing it. Is the
problem corrected?
• manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4)
• delivery sensor (PS3)
YES: End.
DC controller PCB, Image processor PCB, Power supply PCB
5) 1. If the cassette paper sensor (PS103) or the paper leading edge
sensor (PS102) is faulty, try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?
2. If the manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4) is faulty, try replacing
the image processor PCB. Is the problem corrected?
3. If the delivery sensor (PS3) is faulty, try replacing the power sup-
ply PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: If the manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4) or the delivery sensor
(PS3) is faulty, replace the DC controller PCB.

4.2.10 The message “PLATEN IS OPEN CLOSE THE PLATEN Unit” fails
to go OFF.
Sensor flag
1) Is the reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1) damaged or dis-
placed?
Connector
2) Is the connection between the connector of the reader unit slide de-
tecting switch (SW1) and the connector J314 on the image proces-
sor PCB normal?
Reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1), Image processor PCB
3) Try replacing the reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1). Is the
problem corrected?
YES: End.

4.3 Troubleshooting Malfunctions

(if equipped with ADF functions)
4.3.1 Original pickup fails.
General conditions
1) Does the ADF motor rotate?
YES: Go through steps 2) through 4).
NO: Go to step 5) through 6).
General conditions
2) Is the original separation roller rotating?
NO: Check the gear and timing belt used to transmit the drive of the
ADF motor (M3). If scratched, replace it.
Original pickup roller descent/Original stopper ascent mechanism
3) Does the original pickup roller move down and the original stopper
move up during original pickup?
NO: Check the parts of the original separation roller unit, and correct
any fault. If scratched, replace it.
Rollers (separation roller unit)
4) Is the surface of each roller of the separation roller unit normal?
NO: Replace the faulty roller.
ADF motor (connection)
5) Is the ADF motor harness connected firmly?
ADF motor (M3), Image processor PCB
6) Try replacing the ADF motor (M3). Is the problem corrected?
YES: End

4.4 Troubleshooting Malfunctions (printer functions)

If the results of all work in the troubleshooting flow in 2.2 are good and yet a fault occurs
when a printer function is used (printing from a PC), go through the following:
4.4.1 Printing fails to start.

4.4.2 Printing stops in the middle.
Status check
1) Can test print be done from the PC?
YES: Explain the user that the trouble cause is probably not within the
machine.
Operating environment
2) Is the PC used meet the requirements of the machine?
NO: Explain the user that PC environment must satisfy the requirements
of the machine. (Refer to Quick Start Guide.)
Status check
3) Run the troubleshooter of the machine from the PC. Are the check
results normal?
NO: Correct the problem according to the description displayed as the
check results.
Connection of interface cables to PC
4) Is the connection of the interface cables normal?
NO: Connect securely. Replace the cable if it has scratches, etc.
PC settings
5) Are the PC settings correct? (Printer port setting, printer driver
selection, etc.)
NO: Correct the settings. (Refer to Quick Start Guide, Print Guide, and
operation manual of the PC.)
Interface cables
6) Are the cables meet the specifications of the model?
NO: Replace the cables with the ones that satisfy the specifications of
the model.
USB cable specifications: 5 m or shorter
Parallel interface cable specifications: 3 m or shorter (compliant to
IEEE1284, for bi-directional communication)
Printer driver
7) Is the problem remedied after reinstalling an optimal printer
driver?
YES: End

Connector
8) Is the connection of the printer controller PCB (J709) and the im-
age processor PCB (J318) normal?
it.
Printer controller PCB
9) Try replacing the printer controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.

4.5 Troubleshooting
(faults unique to models equipped with fax functions)
4.5.1 Troubleshooting Communication Faults
Go through the troubleshooting flow chart*; if you cannot reach the last step of the flow
of work and the fault occurs while a fax function is in use, go through the following: 2.2 of
Chapter 7.
1) Find out the conditions in which the fault occurs in detail.

a. operation used; i.e., number of pages, transmission mode, timing of error occurrence
(as before or after transmission), user of auto-dialing
b. faulty image samples (store away; in the case of reception)
c. LCD indication at time of the fault
d. activity report at time of the fault
e. user information: abbreviation, telephone number, fax number, model name
f. other-party information: name, telephone number, fax number, model
g. frequency of occurrence, type of error
h. fax condition at other party; number of pages transmitted/received, auto or manual; re-
ception condition
If you are visiting in response to a report, try to obtain a system dump list
REF. for a. and g.
2) Go through the following flow chart to conduct a communication test.

• Try a test several times for each item using the actual telephone line; check the symp-
toms, and keep a record.
3) Evaluate all the information you have colleted, and take appropriate action based on
comprehensive evaluation.
If the other party is a non-Canon machine and no fault is found in the user’s
machine, arrange for an investigation of the other party. Advise the user on
REF.
the situation.

• Troubleshooting a Communication Fault (Canon machine in use)

Try a 3-station communication as indicated in the following diagram:
Trouble
FAX:A FAX:B
FAX:C
Start A: machine of the user

B: machine of the other party
C: test machine within the same block
(best if of the same model as A)
RX
TX/RX?
TX
NG NG
A to C C to A
OK Check A OK Check A
NG NG
C to B B to C
OK OK
Check the line Check B Check the line Check B

and the line and the line
F07-405-01

4.5.2 Service Error Code Output

If ‘1’ is set to service data #1 SSSW SW01 bit 0, an appropriate service error code will be
indicated on the following reports if a communication ends in error: communication control
report, reception result report, error transmission report.
When an error occurs, you can generate a system dump list in service mode to check the
code.
4.5.3 Error Codes

The error codes used in the machine are defined as follows:
4.5.3.1 Transmission Level (ATT): No.07 of Service Soft Switch #2 MENU

• Increase the transmission level:
Increase the setting so that it is closer to 0 dBm. (At 0 dBm, the LCD indicates ‘0’.)
• Decrease the transmission level:
Decrease the setting so that it is closer to -15 dBm. (At -15 dBm, the LCD indicates
‘15’.)
4.5.3.2 NL Equalizer: No.05 of Service Soft Switch #2 MENU

• Adjust the NL equalizer:
Select ‘ON’.
4.5.3.3 Transmission Page Timer: SW12 of Service Soft Switch #1 SSSW

• Increase the page timer setting:
To set both transmission and reception to the same time-out length, set SW12 as fol-
lows:
8 min: bit 7, bit 1, bit 0 = 0, 0, 0
16 min: bit 7, bit 1, bit 0 = 0, 0, 1
32 min: bit 7, bit 1, bit 0 = 0, 1, 0
64 min: bit 7, bit 1, bit 0 = 0, 1, 1
If you want to set transmission and reception to different time-out lengths, or use differ-
ent time-out lengths according to different image modes, you will have to set all bits (from
7 through 0) accordingly.
4.5.3.4 T0 Timer: No.10 of Service Soft Switch #3 NUMERIC param.

• Increase the T0 timer setting:
Increase the setting of No.10.
The T0 timer is used to set the period of time in which a line connection is recognized
for transmission, i.e., in which the machine waits for a significant signal from the other
party after dialing. The line will be disconnected if no significant signal is received during
the period.

4.5.3.5 T1 Timer: No.11 of Service Soft Switch #3 NUMERIC param.

• Increase the T1 timer setting:
Increase the setting of No.11.
The T1 timer is used to set the period of time in which a line connection is recognized
for reception, i.e., in which the machine waits for a significant signal from the other party
after transmission of DIS. The line will be disconnected if no significant signal is received
during the period.
4.5.3.6 RTN Signal Transmission Condition: No. 02, 03, and 04 of Service Soft
Switch #3 NUMERIC param.
• Loosen the RTN signal transmission condition:
Increase the settings of No.02, 03, and 04.
No.02 is used to set the ratio of the number of error lines to the total number of lines per
page (1% to 99%).
No.03 is used to set the burst error (number of successive error lines identified as an er-
rors) ; (2 to 99 lines).
No.04 is used to set the number of errors falling short of a burst error (1 to 99 times).
4.5.3.7 Echo Remedy

• An echo remedy may be provided on the reception side as follows:
Echo Remedy 1 (by the receiving machine; adds a 1080-Hz total signal before
transmission of CED):
Set SW03 bit 7 of service soft switch #1 SSSW to ‘1’ so that a 1080-Hz total signal is
transmitted before transmission of CED.
Echo Remedy 2 (by the receiving machine; changes the period in which the low
speed signal is ignored after transmission of CFR):
Set SW04 bit 4 of service soft switch #1 SSSW to ‘1’ so that the period in which the
low speed signal is ignored after transmission of CFR is changed from 700 to 1500 msec.
4.5.3.8 Echo Protect Tone: SW03 bit 1 of Service Soft Switch #1 SSSW
• Add an echo protect tone to the V.29 modem signal for transmission:
When SW03 bit 1 is set to ‘1’, an echo protect tone will be added to high-speed trans-
mission V.29 (at 9600 or 7200 bps) for transmission.
4.5.3.9 Number of Final Flag Sequences: SW04 bit 2 of Service Soft Switch #1
SSSW
• Increase the number of final flag sequences:
When SW04 bit 2 is set to ‘1’, the number of final flag sequences will be increased from
1 to 2 for a procedure signal (transmitted at 300 bps).

4.5.3.10 Subaddress
A subaddress is used to indicate the location of a memory box in the other party (e.g.,
confidential mailbox, polling box), and it consists of 20 or fewer characters (numerals, *,
#, space). As log as the other party complies with the International Standards of ITU-T, the
machine can communicate with it by means of subaddresses.
At times, an ID number (referred to as a “password”) is used to restrict access to a loca-
tion indicated by a subaddress.
With some models, polling based on subaddresses is called “selective polling”, and a
subaddress used at time of polling is called a “selective polling address”.
4.5.3.11 Password
A password used by a Canon facsimile machine may be any of the following:
Password for Subaddress Communications:
This is an ID number used for a subaddress communication and, as in the case of a
subaddress, it consists of 20 or fewer characters (numerals, *, #, space).
Communication Password:
This is an ID number used for a password communication. Some models use 4 decimal
characters (0000 through 9999), while some use 3 decimal characters (000 through 255).
Password Used When Making Settings:

A password may also be used for memory lock Rx, call restriction, and
Memo other functions. Such a password consists of 4 decimal characters (0000
through 9999), and it is important to remember that these passwords are
used inside the machine and are not intended for communication proce-
dures.
4.5.3.12 Signals
Tonal Signal:
A tonal signal consists of sinusoidal waves of a specific frequency, and may be thought
of as a sound carrying a meaning. CNG, CED, and ANSam are tonal signals.
Binary Signal:
A binary signal is used to indicate the meaning of a procedure. It is either ‘1’ or ‘0’,
modulated according to frequency, and is used as G3 procedure signals.
Procedure Signal:
It is a generic term for a tonal signal and a binary signal.
Preamble:
It is a signal attached to the beginning of a binary signal, and is used to synchronize mo-
dem signals for a procedure signal.
Image Signal:
Of procedure signals, it is used for actual transmission of image data.
Significant Signal:
It is a signal whose significance can be understood by a facsimile machine that receives
it, and it is free of a transmission error.

4.5.3.13 Timer
T0 Timer:
It indicates the period of time in which a line connection is recognized during transmis-
sion; specifically, the machine waits for a significant signal from the other party after dial-
ing.
T1 Timer:
It indicates the period of time in which a line connection is recognized during reception;
specifically, the machine waits for a significant signal from the together party after trans-
mission of DIS.
T5 Timer:
It is the period of time in which RR/RNR is transmitted during an ECM communication.

4.5.4 HOW TO RECORD THE PROTOCOL

If you are instructed to “record the communication procedure sound on a DAT or MD,
and ask the Technical Center for analysis”, refer to the following diagram for a generally
used method of connection:
FAX
Telephone line
FAX TELLINE
G3 Recording Adaptor
LINE
DAT recorder
or
MD recorder LINE IN
Use Standard (SP) mode for recording.

Set the recording level so that the sound of communication
can clearly be heard with as littel noise as possible when replayed.
F07-405-02

4.5.5 Causes and Remedies for User Error Codes

The causes and remedies for individual user error codes are as follows:
#001 [TX] Document has jammed

Cause: The original is trapped in the feeder
Remedy: Remove the document, and try again.
Cause: The original is not of a standard size or thickness.
Remedy: 1. Make a copy on A4/LTR paper in book mode, and transmit the output.
2. If the original is too thin or too small, transmit it in book mode.
Cause: Internal Fault
Remedy: 1. Check the connection of the DS sensor (original sensor), DES sensor (registra-
tion sensor), and image processor PCB.
2. Check the following to see if they operate normally: DS sensor (original sen-
sor), DES senor (registration sensor). (See 6.1 of Chapter 7.)
3. Replace the DS sensor (original sensor) and the DES sensor (registration sen-
sor).
4. Check the connection between the ADF motor and the image processor PCB.
5. Make copies to find out if the ADF motor is operating normally.
6. Replace the image processor PCB.
#003 [TX/RX] Document is too long, or page time-over
Cause: The length of a single page is too long.

Remedy: Make copies in book mode, and transmit the original in several divisions.
Cause: The data of a single page is too large, exceeding the time allowed for transmis-
sion.
Remedy: 1. Decrease the reading resolution when transmitting.
2. If the original is too long and, thus, results in a large amount of data, make cop-
ies in book mode, and transmit the original in several divisions.
3. If halftone transmission is used, the original is of a default size, and the data is
too large, increase the setting of the page timer.
Cause: The data of a single page is too large, exceeding the time allowed for reception.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to decrease the reading resolution and trans-
mit.
2. Ask the operator of the other party to divide the original and transmit.
3. Increase the setting of the page timer.
4. Ask the operator of the other party to find out the cause.
Cause: An internal mechanism is faulty.
Remedy: 1. Check the connection of the DES sensor (registration sensor) and image proces-
sor PCB.
2. Check the following to see if they operate normally: DES senor (registration
sensor). (See 6.1 of Chapter 7.)
3. Replace the DES sensor (registration sensor).

4. Check the connection between the ADF motor and the image processor PCB.
5. Make copies to find out if the ADF motor is operating normally.
#005 [TX/RX] Initial identification (T0/T1) time-over

Cause: The tone/pulse setting is wrong.
Remedy: Make the correct tone/pulse setting.
Cause: The time it takes to connect to the other party’s line is too long.
Remedy: 1. When registering an auto-dial number, put a relatively long pause after the tele-
phone number to delay the T0 timer start mechanism.
2. In service mode, increase the T0 timer length using ‘10’ of #3 Numeric param.
so that a time-cover condition will not occur. (for transmission)
3. In service mode, increase the T1 timer length using ‘11’ of #3 Numeric param.
so that a time-over condition will not occur. (for reception)
Cause: The other party does not respond.
Remedy: Contact the operator of the other party, and find out the cause.
Cause: The other party’s communication mode (G2, G3, etc.) does not match.
Remedy: The communication mode depends on each specific model, and no remedy can be
offered.
Cause: During transmission, the other party malfunctioned because of an echo.
Remedy: 1. Using a manual call, press the Start button after hearing the 1st DIS from the
other party.
2. To prevent response to the 1st DIS from the other party, put a relatively long
pause to the telephone number when registering an auto-dial number.
3. Ask the operator of the other party to provide echo remedy 1.
4. Ask the operator of the other party to decrease the transmission level.
Cause: During reception, the machine malfunctioned because of an echo.
Remedy: Provide echo remedy 1.
#009 [RX] Paper has jammed or the paper has run out
Cause: The paper has run out.
Remedy: Set new paper.
Cause: A paper jam has occurred.
Remedy: Remove the paper jam. (See 5.2 of Chapter 7.)

#011 [RX] Polling reception error

Cause: There is no original in the other party.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to set the original correctly.
Cause: Transmission was attempted, and polling reception was started because the docu-
ment was not set correctly.
Remedy: Set the original correctly to transmit.
#012 [TX] The other party has run out of paper

Cause: The other party has run out of paper.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to set paper.
#018 [TX] Auto dialing transmission error

Cause: The tone/pulse setting is wrong.
Remedy: Make the correct tone/pulse setting.
Cause: The connection time for the line is too long.
Remedy: 1. When registering an auto-dial number, put a relatively long pause at the end of
the telephone number to delay the start of the T0 timer.
2. Increase the T0 timer setting to prevent a time-over condition.
Cause: The line of the other party was engaged.
Remedy: Start a call once again.
Cause: The other party is not connected to the line, or is not turned on so that the trans-
mission did not arrive.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to find out the cause.
Cause: The other party is not a facsimile machine.
Remedy: Check the number of the other party, and start a call once again.
Cause: The other party ran out of paper so that the line was disconnected during the pre-
procedure.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other machine to set paper.
Cause: The machine was disconnected from the line using an unidentified reason code.
Remedy: 1. Wait for a while, and start a call once again.
2. Check to make sure that the other party is tuned on.
Cause: 1. The other party did not respond.
2. The other party is out of order.
3. The other party is out of use for some reason.
4. The exchange is congested.
5. There is no line/channel that is available at present.
6. The requested line/channel cannot be used on the side of the other party.
7. Calls crashed.
8. Communication is not possible at present by reason of terminal management.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to find out the cause.

#021 [RX] The other party has rejected the machine during polling reception
Cause: When starting a call, a subaddress, or a subaddress and a password, was not speci-
fied.
Remedy: Specify a subaddress, or a subaddress and a password, when starting a call.
#022 [TX] Call fails

Cause: The data for an auto-dial number used when selecting a party was deleted.
Remedy: Register the telephone number of the other party as an auto-dial number, and
transmit once again.
#025 [TX/RX] Auto-dial setting is wrong

Cause: The settings require registration of a subaddress for auto-dialing; however, a call
was attempted without registering a subaddress.
Remedy: If auto-dialing is of a type requiring registration of a subaddress, register a
subaddress.
#037 [RX] Memory has overflowed when receiving images

Cause: The image memory overflowed during reception.
Remedy: Delete image data that is no longer needed, and ask the operator of the other party
to transmit once again.
#059 [TX] Dialed number and the connected number (CSI) do not match
Cause: The user telephone number is not registered correctly on the receiving side.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the receiving side to register the user telephone number cor-
rectly.
2. Use manual transmission; then, after making sure that a connection has been
made, transmit once again.
Cause: The exchange malfunctioned, and the machine is not connected to the dialed
party.
Remedy: Have the exchange checked.
#080 [TX] The other party is not equipped with an ITU-T-compliant

subaddress reception function
Cause: Bit 49 of DIS received from the other party is ‘0’.
Remedy: 1. Transmit to a fax machine equipped with a subaddress function.
2. Use normal G3 transmission.

#081 [TX] The other party is not equipped with an ITU-T-compliant password
reception function
Remedy: 1. Transmit to a fax machine equipped with a password function.
2. Use subaddress transmission that does not use a password.
3. Use normal G3 transmission.
#082 [RX] The other party is not equipped with an ITU-T-compliant selective
polling transmission function
Remedy: Ask the operator to set normal polling transmission, and use polling reception.
#083 [RX] Selective polling address or the password does not match during
ITU-T-compliant selective polling reception
Cause: The selective polling address or the password of the machine does not match that
of the other machine.
Remedy: Match the selective polling address and the password of the machine with that of
the other party.
#084 [RX] The other party is not equipped with a password function for ITU-T-
compliant selective polling reception
Remedy: Use selective polling that does not use a password.
#995 [TX/RX] Memory transmission reservation clear/memory reception image clear

Cause: In the case of transmission, the user canceled the memory transmission reserva-
tion.
Remedy: Transmit once again.
Cause: In the case of reception, the user deleted the image that had been received in
memory reception.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to transmit once again.

4.5.6 Causes and Remedies for Service Error Codes

The causes and remedies for service error codes are as follows:
##100 [TX] The number allowed for retransmission of the procedure signal was
exceeded during transmission
Cause: The transmission level is too low, and the other party cannot receive NSS, TSI,
DCS, TCF, or the training signal correctly.
Remedy: Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the signal cor-
rectly.
Cause: After transmission of TCF immediately before the image signal, the other party
malfunctioned because of an echo.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to provide echo remedy 2
2. Using a manual call, press the Start button after hearing the 1st DIS from the
other party.
pause to the telephone number when registering an auto-dialing number.
Cause: After transmission of the Q signal following the image signal, the line condition
became poor so that the other party cannot receive the image signal or the Q sig-
nal correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may service the image
signal or the Q signal correctly.
2. Decrease the transmission start speed.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive the image signal or
the Q signal correctly.
4. Add an echo protect tone to the V.29 modem signal for transmission.
5. Increase the number of final flag sequences for the procedure signal so that the
other party may receive the procedure signal correctly.

##101 [TX/RX]The modem speed of the machine does not match that of the other
party
Cause: The modem speed of the machine does not match that of the other machine.
Remedy: The modem speed is part of machine specifications, and there is no remedy.
Cause: In the case of transmission, the speed for fallback does not match that of the other
party.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive TCF cor-
rectly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive TCF correctly.
3. Provide echo remedy 1.
4. Using a manual call, press the Start button after hearing the 1st DIS from the
other party.
6. Ask the operator of the other party to decrease the transmission level so that the
other party will not receive an echo.
##102 [TX] Fallback is not possible

Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive TCF correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive TCF cor-
rectly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive TCF correctly.
Cause: An echo has caused a malfunction.
other party.
##103 [RX] EOL cannot be detected for 5 sec (15 sec if CBT)
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal cannot be received correctly.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the
image signal may be received correctly.
2. Ask the operator of the other party to decrease the transmission start speed.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the image signal may be received correctly.
Cause: The machine malfunctioned because of an echo of CFR.
Remedy: 1. Provide echo remedy 2.
2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo of transmitted CFR will not be
received.

##104 [TX] RTN or PIN has been received

Cause: The line condition is poor so that the other party cannot receive the image signal
correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the image
signal correctly.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive the image signal
correctly.
5. Ask the operator of the other party to loosen the RTN transmission conditions
so that the other party will not transmit RTN.
Cause: The machine malfunctioned because of an echo.
other party.
##106 [RX] The procedure signal cannot be received for 6 sec while in wait
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the procedure signal from the other party cannot be
received correctly.
procedure signal may be received correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the procedure signal may be received correctly.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive the signal.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the signal
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive the signal correctly.
2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo of transmitted signal will not be
received.

##107 [RX] The transmitting machine cannot use fall-back

Cause: The line condition is poor, and the signal from the other party cannot be received
correctly even at 2400 bps.
signal may be received correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the signal may be received correctly.
3. Loosen the RTN transmission conditions so that RTN will not be transmitted.
2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo of the transmitted signal will
not be received.
##109 [TX] After transmitting DCS, a signal other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR,
and CRP was received, exceeding the permitted number of trans-
missions of the procedure signal
Cause: The procedure signal is faulty.
Remedy: Record the protocol on a DAT or MD, and have it analyzed by the local Canon
office and/or Technical Center.
##111 [TX/RX]Memory error

Cause: While printing data stored in the image memory, the effects of noise caused a data
error.
Remedy: Print out all image data and system data, and execute all-clear; then, store the sys-
tem data once again.
Cause: Noise started wrong dialing.
Remedy: Replace the image processor PCB.
##114 [RX] RTN was transmitted

Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal from the other party cannot be
received correctly.
Cause: The machine malfunctioned because of an echo of CFR.
received.

##200 [RX] During image reception, a carrier is not detected for 5 sec
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal cannot be received.
Cause: The training signal cannot be received because of an echo of CFR, causing a time-
over condition.
received.
##201 [TX/RX]DCN was received through a non-normal procedure
Cause: The other party is not ready for reception (e.g., out of paper).
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to set the machine for reception (as by setting
paper).
Cause: The user telephone number has not been registered (if the receiving machine is a
RICOH 3000L).
Remedy: Register the user telephone number.
Cause: In polling transmission, document is not placed.
Remedy: Place a document, and ask the operator of the other party to make a call once
again.
Cause: The other party transmitted, but there is no paper.
Remedy: Set paper.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive the procedure signal
correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the procedure
signal correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive the procedure sig-
nal correctly.
Remedy: 1. Provide echo remedies 1 or 2.
2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo will not be received.
Cause: The image signal or the Q signal cannot be received, and the other party suffered
an excess number of re-transmissions of the procedure signal.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party (transmitting machine) cannot use
fall-back.

##220 [TX/RX]System error (e.g., main program may have gone away)
Cause: Noise caused the CPU to malfunction.
Remedy: Turn off and then on the power.
##223 [TX] The line was disconnected during communication

Cause: The Stop button was pressed during image transmission.
##224 [TX/RX]Fault occurred in the communication procedure signal

Cause: The original on the transmitting party is not correctly fed, forcing polling mode to
start (i.e., DCN was received in response to DIS).
Remedy: 1. Check to make user that the original is placed correctly.
2. If the feeding roller is worn, replace it.
Cause: In a memory full condition, a call arrived when a original was set (i.e., DCN was
received in response to DIS).
Remedy: If any image received in memory reception remains in the memory, print out the
image and empty the memory. Also, avoid leaving a original in the copyboad glass
unless the machine is in transmission mode.
##229 [RX] The recording system became locked for 1 min

Cause: Not identified.
Remedy: Correct the locking, and press the Start button to print out the image.
##232 [TX] The unit used to control the encoder is faulty

Cause: The operation of the IC used to control the encoder did not end normally.
##237 [RX] The IC used to control the decoder malfunctioned

Cause: The operation of the IC used to control the decoder did not end normally.
##238 [RX] The unit used to control recording malfunctioned

Cause: The operation of the IC used to control recording did not end normally.
Remedy: Replace the DC controller PCB.
##261 [TX/RX]System error occurred between the modem and system control board
Cause: An internal unit is faulty (when RS is set to ‘1’, CS fails to go ‘1’).
Remedy: Replace the image processor PCB. (faulty modem)

##280 [TX] The number of re-transmissions of the procedure signal has been
exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the appropriate signal from the other party cannot
be received correctly after transmission of TCF.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive TCF correctly.
2. Ask the other party to increase the transmission level so that the appropriate
Cause: The other party malfunctioned because of an echo.
other party.
Cause: The telephone line has a faulty connection.
Remedy: Check to see that the telephone line is connected correctly.
Cause: During a communication, the telephone line was disconnected.
Remedy: Avoid disconnecting the telephone line while a communication is under way.
exceeded
be received correctly after transmission of EOP.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOP cor-
rectly.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOP correctly.
5. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the
appropriate signal may be received correctly.
exceeded
be received correctly after transmission of EOM.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOM cor-
rectly.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOM correctly.

exceeded
be received correctly after transmission of MPS.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive MPS cor-
rectly.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive MPS correctly.
##284 [TX] DCN has been received after transmission of TCF

Cause: The other party is not ready for reception (e.g., out of paper).
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to set the machine for reception (as by setting
paper).
Cause: The user telephone number has not been registered (if the receiving machine is a
RICOH 3000L).
Remedy: Register the user telephone number.
Cause: The other party cannot receive TCF correctly.
Remedy: Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive TCF correctly.
other party.
##285 [TX] DCN has been received after transmitting EOP

Cause: The Stop button was pressed during a communication.
##286 [TX] DCN has been received after transmitting EOM

##287 [TX] DCN has been received after transmitting MPS


##288 [TX] After transmitting EOP, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or
RTN was received
Cause: The procedure signal has a fault.
##289 [TX] After transmitting EOM, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or
RTN was received
##290 [TX] After transmitting MPS, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or
RTN was received
##750 [TX] In ECM transmission, no significant signal can be received after

transmission of PPS-NULL, and the allowed number of procedure
signal re-transmissions was exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-NULL cor-
rectly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-NULL
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-NULL cor-
rectly.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the significant signal cannot be received correctly.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the
##752 [TX] In ECM transmission, DCN was received after transmission of

PPS-NULL
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-NULL cor-
rectly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-NULL
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-NULL cor-
rectly.
Cause: The Stop key was pressed during a communication.

##753 [TX] In ECM transmission, the allowed number of procedure signal re-
transmissions was exceeded or a T5 time-over (60 sec) condition
occurred after transmission of PPS-NULL
Cause: The page buffer of the other party is full or is engaged; as such, although RNR
was received after transmission of PPS-NULL and then RR was transmitted, no
significant signal was received correctly thereafter.
Remedy: 1. Start G3 mode, and transmit once again (Prohibit the ECM mode).
3. Record the protocol on a DAT or MD, and have it analyzed by the local Canon
transmissions was exceeded after transmission of PPS-NULL
Cause: The line condition is poor; as such, although PPR was received 4 times after trans-
mission of PPS-NULL and then CTC was transmitted, the other party could not
receive it correctly.
Remedy: Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive CTC correctly.
mission of PPS-NULL and then CTC was transmitted, no significant signal was
received correctly thereafter.

transmission of PPS-MPS, and the allowed number of procedure
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-MPS correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-MPS
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-MPS correctly.


PPS-MPS
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-MPS correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-MPS
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-MPS correctly.
occurred after transmission of PPS-MPS
was received after transmission of PPS-MPS and then RR was transmitted, no sig-
nificant signal was received correctly thereafter.
transmissions was exceeded after transmission of PPS-MPS
mission of PPS-MPS and then CTC was transmitted, the other party could not re-
ceive it correctly.
mission of PPS-MPS and then CTC was transmitted, no significant signal was re-
ceived correctly thereafter.


transmission of PPS-EOM, and the allowed number of procedure
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-EOM correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-EOM
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-EOM cor-
rectly.

PPS-EOM
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-EOM correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-EOM
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-EOM cor-
rectly.
occurred after transmission of PPS-EOM
was received after transmission of PPS-EOM and then RR was transmitted, no sig-

transmissions was exceeded after transmission of PPS-EOM
mission of PPS-EOM and then CTC was transmitted, the other party could not
receive it correctly.
mission of PPS-EOM and then CTC was transmitted, no significant signal was
received correctly thereafter.

transmission of PPS-EOP, and the allowed number of procedure
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-EOP correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-EOP
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-EOP correctly.
The line condition is poor, and the significant signal cannot be received correctly.
Cause: Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the
Remedy: signal may be received correctly.

PPS-EOP
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-EOP correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-EOP
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-EOP correctly.

occurred after transmission of PPS-EOP
was received after transmission of PPS-EOP and then RR was transmitted, no sig-
transmissions was exceeded after transmission of PPS-EOP
mission of PPS-EOP and then CTC was transmitted, the other party could not re-
ceive it correctly.
mission of PPS-EOP and then CTC was transmitted, no significant signal was re-
ceived correctly thereafter.

transmission of EOR-NULL, and the allowed number of procedure
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-NULL cor-
rectly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-NULL
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-NULL cor-
rectly.


EOR-NULL
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-NULL cor-
rectly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-NULL
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-NULL cor-
rectly.
occurred after transmission of EOR-NULL
was received after transmission of EOR-NULL and then RR was transmitted, no
##774 [TX] In ECM transmission, ERR was received after transmission of

EOR-NULL
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot often receive the image sig-
nal correctly.
signal correctly.
correctly.
other party.


transmission of EOR-MPS, and the allowed number of procedure
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-MPS correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-MPS
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-MPS cor-
rectly.

EOR-MPS
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-MPS correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-MPS
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-MPS cor-
rectly.
occurred after transmission of EOR-MPS
was received after transmission of EOR-MPS and then RR was transmitted, no


EOR-MPS
nal correctly.
signal correctly.
correctly.
other party.

transmission of EOR-EOM, and the allowed number of procedure
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-EOM cor-
rectly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-EOM
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-EOM cor-
rectly.

EOR-EOM
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-EOM cor-
rectly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-EOM
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-EOM cor-
rectly.

occurred after transmission of EOR-EOM
was received after transmission of EOR-EOM and then RR was transmitted, no

EOR-EOM
nal correctly.
signal correctly.
correctly.
other party.

transmission of EOR-EOP, and the allowed number of procedure
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-EOP correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-EOP
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-EOP cor-
rectly.


EOR-EOP
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-EOP correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-EOP
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-EOP cor-
rectly.
occurred after transmission of EOR-EOP
was received after transmission of EOR-EOP and then RR was transmitted, no sig-

EOR-EOP
nal correctly.
signal correctly.
correctly.
other party.

##790 [TX] In ECM reception, ERR was transmitted after reception of EOR-Q
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal cannot often be received cor-
rectly.
2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo is not received.
##791 [TX/RX]During an ECM mode procedure, a signal other than a significant

signal was received
##792 [RX] In ECM reception, PPS-NULL between partial pages cannot be de-
tected
Cause: The line condition is poor, and PPS-NULL cannot be received.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that
PPS-NULL may be received correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that PPS-NULL may be received correctly.
##793 [RX] In ECM reception, no effective frame was detected while signals
were received at high speed, and a time-over condition occurred
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive CFR correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive CFR cor-
rectly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive CFR correctly.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal cannot be received correctly.
Cause: An echo of CFR prevents reception of the training signal.
2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo of the transmitted CFR will not
be received.
##795 [TX/RX]A fault occurred in decoding process during a communication

Cause: The communication CODEC is busy.
Remedy: 1. Disconnecting and connecting the power cord.

4.5.7 Common Faults
No communication occurs.
Cause The modular cable is not connected to the modular jack used for line con-
nection.
Remedy Connect the modular cable to the modular jack used for line connection.
A call cannot be made.
Cause The selected type of line (tone or dial) is different from the type of the con-
nected line.
Remedy Select the type of line identical to the type of the connected line.

5 Troubleshooting Feeding Faults

5.1 Outline
The machine distinguishes between paper jams and original jams (if equipped with ADF
functions), and they are further grouped according to location:
[1] Cassette pickup assembly [3] Feeding assembly
[2] Manual feed tray assembly [4] Fixing delivery assembly
[2]
[4] [3] [1]

F07-501-01

5.2 Paper Jams

5.2.1 Pickup Assembly (cassette)
General conditions
1) Are the following rollers rotating? (See 5.2.5 of Chapter 7.)
• cassette pickup roller
• vertical path roller
NO: Fit it correctly.
Cassette
2) Is the cassette fitted correctly?
Paper
3) Is the paper placed correctly?
NO: Place it correctly.
Paper stack
4) Is the amount of paper placed in the cassette more than allowed?
YES: Advise the user on the limit of paper.
Paper
5) Is the paper curled or wavy?
YES: Replace the paper, and advise the user on the correct method of
storing paper.
Paper
6) Try paper of a recommended type. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Advise the user to use recommended paper.
Cassette holding plate spring, Rollers (cassette pickup system)
7) Is the holding plate of the cassette in up position?
YES: Clean the cassette pickup roller/vertical path roller. If scratched,
replace it.
NO: Check the cassette holding plate spring, and correct any fault. If
damaged, replace it.
Main motor
8) Is the main motor rotating?
Gears (drive assembly; for cassette pickup roller drive/vertical path drive)
9) Is any of the gears in the drive assembly (for cassette pickup roller
drive/vertical path roller drive) cracked or damaged?
YES: Replace the damaged gear.

Connector (if the cassette pickup roller is not rotating)

10) Is the connection of the connectors on the image processor PCB
(J303, J307) and the DC controller PCB (J204) normal?
it.
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL2; if the cassette pickup roller is not rotating)
11) Try replacing the cassette pickup solenoid (SL2). Is the problem
corrected?
YES: End.
DC controller PCB, Image processor PCB (if the cassette pickup roller is not rotating)
YES: End.
Connector (main motor)
13) Is the connection of the connector of the main motor unit and the
connector (J312) on the image processor PCB normal?
Main motor
14) Try replacing the main motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
YES: End.

5.2.2 Pickup Assembly (manual feed tray)
General conditions
1) Is the manual feed pickup roller rotating?
NO: Go to step 7).
Paper
NO: Place the paper correctly.
Paper stack
3) Is the amount of paper placed in the manual feed tray more than
allowed?
YES: Advise the user on the amount of paper that may be placed.
Paper
storing paper.
Paper
Paper guide plate ascent mechanism, Manual feed pickup roller
6) Does the paper guide plate move up in conjunction with pickup op-
eration?
YES: Clean the manual feed roller. If scratched, replace it.
NO: Check to see if the spring used to push up the paper guide is
mounted correctly.
Main motor
7) Is the main motor rotating?
Gear (in drive assembly; for manual feed pickup roller drive)
8) Is any of the gears in the drive assembly (used to drive the manual
feed pickup roller) cracked or damaged?
YES: Replace the faulty gear.
Connector
9) Is the connection of the connectors on the image processor PCB
(J303, J308) and on the DC controller PCB (J204) normal?
it.

Manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1)

10) Replace the manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1). Is the problem cor-
rected?
YES: End.
YES: End.
Connector (main motor)
12) Is the connection of the connector of the main motor unit and the
connector (J312) on the image processor PCB normal?
Main motor
13) Try replacing the main motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
YES: End.

5.2.3 Feeding Assembly
General conditions
1) Are the following components rotating normally? (See 5.2.5 of
Chapter 7.)
• gears in contact with photosensitive drum
NO: Go to step 11).
Paper
storing paper.
Paper
YES: Advise the user to user recommended paper.
Feeding assembly
4) Is the surface of the following components normal?
NO: Clean the soiled component. If scratched, replace it. If the photo-
sensitive drum is scratched, replace the cartridge.
Registration roller locking mechanisms
5) Is the registration roller locking spring normal?
NO: Replace the locking spring.
Registration shutter mechanism
6) Is the registration shutter spring normal?
NO: Replace the locking spring.
Paper path
7) Is there dirt or foreign matter in the paper path?
YES: Clean the paper path. If any, remove the foreign matter.
General conditions
8) Is LGL paper placed in the cassette?
YES: Go through steps 9) and 10).
NO: Check the jam sensor. (See 4.2.9 of Chapter 7.)
Side guide plate
9) Is the side guide plate of the cassette mounted correctly?
NO: Mount the side guide plate correctly. If scratched, replace it.

Sensor flag
10) Is the flag for the LGL paper sensor (PS101) damaged or dis-
placed?
Gear (in drive assembly; for registration roller, photosensitive drum, transfer charging roller
drive)
11) Is any of the gears in the drive assembly cracked or damaged (used
to drive the registration roller, photosensitive drum, transfer charg-
ing roller)?
YES: Replace the damaged gear. If the gear on the photosensitive drum
side is damaged, replace the cartridge.)

5.2.4 Fixing Delivery Assembly
General conditions
1) Is the delivery roller rotating normally?
NO: Go to step 8).
Paper
storing paper.
Paper
4) Execute fixing pressure roller cleaning. Is the problem corrected?
(See 4.1.1 of Chapter 6.)
YES: Advise the user to clean the component on a periodical basis.
Fixing inlet guide
5) Is the fixing inlet guide soiled, or is there foreign matter?
YES: Clean it. If there is any foreign matter, remove it.
Roller (fixing delivery system)
6) Is the surface of the following rollers normal?
• delivery roller
NO: Clean the soiled component. If scratched, replace it.
Delivery sensor
7) Check the delivery sensor. Is the problem corrected? (See 4.2.9 of
Chapter 7.)
NO: Replace the delivery sensor.
Gear (in drive assembly; for fixing plessure roller, delivery roller drive)
8) Is any of the gears of the drive assembly (used to drive the fixing
pressure roller, delivery roller) cracked or damaged?
YES: Replace the damaged gear.

5.2.5 Checking the Rotation of the Rollers and Gears

If a jam occurs, go through the following to find out whether the rollers are rotating nor-
mally:
5.2.5.1 Checking the Rotation of the Cassette Pickup Roller and the Vertical Path
Roller
1) Check to be sure that the machine is in standby state.
3) Press the Start key.
4) Check the rotation of the roller through the right door area of the machine.
5.2.5.2 Checking the Rotation of the Registration Roller and the Gear for the Photo-
sensitive Drum
1) Check to be sure that the machine is in standby state.
2) Slide the reader unit.
3) Open the copyboard cover, and remove the reader cover.
4) Open the cartridge cover.
5) Remove the cartridge.
6) While pressing the reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1) with a screwdriver, press the
Start key.
7) Check the rotation of the roller/gear through the right side area of the machine.

5.3 Original Jams (if equipped with ADF functions)
General conditions
1) Are the following rollers of the ADF rotating?
• original separation roller
• ADF registration roller
• white roller
• original feed roller
• original delivery roller
NO: Go to step 7).
General conditions
2) Is the ADF closed firmly?
NO: Close it firmly.
Original
NO: Place the original correctly.
Stack of originals
4) Is the stack of originals in the original placement assembly more
than allowed?
YES: Advise the user on the number of originals that may be paled in the
original placement assembly.
Original
5) Is the original curled or do originals bond together because of static
charge?
YES: Advise the user that the cause is the originals. Remove the curl,
and fan out the originals.
Roller (ADF)
6) Is the surface of the following roller of the ADF normal?
• original separation roller
• ADF registration roller
• white roller
• original feed roller
• original delivery roller
NO: Clean any soiled roller. If scratched, replace it.
Gear, Belt (drive assembly)
7) Is any of the gears or the belts in the drive assembly cracked or
damaged?
YES: Replace the damaged gear/belt.

5.4 Feeding Faults

5.4.1 Double Feeding
Paper
Stack of paper
2) Is the amount of paper in the cassette/manual feed tray more than
allowed?
YES: Advise the user on the amount of paper that may be placed.
Paper
storing paper.
Paper
Claws (cassette)
5) Is the claw of the cassette deformed?
YES: Correct the deformation. If the deformation cannot be corrected,
replace the cassette.
Separation pad, Separation pad pressure spring (manual feed tray)
6) Is the surface of the separation pad of the manual feed tray nor-
mal?
YES: Replace the pressure spring of the separation pad.
NO: Clean it. If worn, replace it.

5.4.2 Wrinkles
Pickup assembly
1) Turn off the power while the paper is being moved. At this time, is
the paper wrinkled or moving askew?
YES: Check the rollers of the pickup assembly and the registration roller
and the registration shutter. If damaged, replace the components.
Paper
Paper
storing paper.
Paper
Fixing assembly inlet guide
5) Is the fixing inlet guide soiled, or is there foreign matter?
YES: Clean it. If there is any foreign matter, remove it.

5.5 Faulty Feeding of Originals (if equipped with ADF func-

tions)
5.5.1 Double Feeding
Original
NO: Place the original correctly.
Stack of originals
2) Is the stack of originals placed in the original placement assembly
more than allowed?
YES: Advise the user on the number of originals that may be placed.
Original
3) Is the original curled or do originals bond together because of static
charge?
YES: Advise the user that the cause is the originals. Remove the curl, or
fan out the originals.
Original separation pad, Pressure spring (original separation pad)
4) Is the surface of the original separation pad normal?
YES: Replace the pressure spring of the original separation pad.
NO: Clean it. If worn or faulty, replace it.
5.5.2 Skew
Slide guide
1) Is the slide guide fitted correctly to suit the width of the original?
Original
2) Are originals of different widths placed together?
YES: Make sure that all originals are of the same width when placed on
the original placement area.
Skew correction
3) Is the skew correction value appropriate?
NO: Execute skew correction. (See 1.3.3.1 of Chapter 7.)
If you have corrected the skew, check to be sure the settings of all other
adjustment items for the ADF are as indicated in specs.
Original separation pad, Roller (separation roller unit)
4) Clean the original separation pad and the rollers of the separation
roller unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the original separation pad or the rollers of the separation
roller unit.

6 Arrangement of the Electrical Parts

6.1 Checking the Photointerrupters
Use ‘SENSOR’ under ‘TEST MODE’ in service mode to check photointerrupters as fol-
lows:
3) Press ‘6’ on the keypad so that ‘6: FACULTY TEST’ is indicated.
4) Press ‘3’ on the keypad to start sensor check mode, in which the following screen ap-
pears:
6-3:SENSOR
[1] - - - [7]
F07-601-01
5) When the screen shown in F07-601-01 is displayed, press ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, or ‘4’ to bring up the
State screen of a specific sensor. For instance, when ‘1’ is pressed, the following will be true:
Sensor name
Present state
of the sensor
DS of DES of DOC A4
CRG on DCVS on
Present state
of the sensor
Sensor name
‘DS of’ indicates that the original sensor (DS) of the ADF is OFF.
F07-601-02
6) Move the flag of the sensor to see that the indication alternates between ‘of’ and ‘on’ to
indicate that the sensor is going OFF and ON.
On the next page, the screens that appear when ‘1’ through ‘4’ are pressed are shown to-
gether with the sensor names and the sensor states when the machine is in standby state.

6-3:SENOR
[1] - - - [7]
'1' is pressed.
DS of DES of DOC A4
CRG on DCVS on
DS: original sensor*1 (PS6); 'on' if present; 'of' if absent

DES: registration sensor*1 (PS7): 'on' if present; 'of' if absent
DOC: not used
CRG: toner cartridge sensor; 'on/of' if present/absent
DCVS: reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1); 'on' if in specific position;
'off' if is on left
*1:state of a specific sensor of the ADF.
'2' is pressed.
HPS on RES of BCVS of
HP: contact sensor home position sensor (PS1);

'on' if in home position,
'of' if not in home positionRES:not used
RES: not used
BCVS: ADF (copyboard cover) open/close sensor (PS2); 'on' if open, 'off' if closed
NDFS: not used
DLS0: not used
DLS1: not used
'3' is pressed.
CT1 on A4 CT2 of
CT3 of CT4 of
CT1: cassette paper sensor (PS103); 'on' if present, 'off' if absent

CT2: not used
T3: not used
CT4: not used
'4' is pressed.
MLT on A4 TN on
RS of JAM of
MLT: manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4); 'on' if present, 'off' if absent
THEN: toner sensor; 'on' if present, 'off'' if absent
RS: not used
JAM: jam detection; 'on' if present, 'off' if absent
F07-601-03

6.2 Arrangement and Functions of Electrical Components

6.2.1 Solenoids, Motors, Fans
6.2.1.1 Body
FM1
M1
M2
M4
SL1
SL2
F07-602-01

6.2.1.2 ADF (if eqquiped with ADF functions)
M3
F07-602-02
Solenoids, Motors, and Fans
T07-602-01
Symbol Name Notation Description
Solenoid SL1 manual feed pickup roller drive
SL
SL2 cassette pickup roller drive
Motor M1 main motor
M2 reader motor
M
M3 ADF motor (if equipped with ADF
functions)
Fan M4 laser scanner motor
FM1 fan

6.2.2 Sensors
6.2.2.1 Body
PS2
PS1
PS3
PS4
PS101 PS102
PS103
F07-602-03

6.2.2.2 ADF (if eqquiped with ADF functions)
PS7 PS8
PS6
F07-602-04
Sensors

Photointerrupters PS1 constant sensor home position de-
tection
PS2 ADF (copyboard cover) open/close
detection
PS3 delivery detection
PS4 manual feed tray paper detection
PS6 original detection (if equipped with
ADF functions)
PS7 ADF registration paper detection
(if equipped with ADF functions)
PS8 original delivery detection (if
equipped with ADF functions)
PS101 LGL paper detection
PS102 paper leading edge detection
PS103 cassette paper detection
T07-602-02

6.2.3 Others
SW1
TH2
SP1 TH1
FU2
H1
F07-602-05

Others

Switch SW1 reader unit slide detecting switch
Heater H1 fixing heater
Thermistor TH1 fixing main thermistor (fixing assembly cen-

ter temperature detection)
TH2 fixing sub thermistor (fixing assembly end
temperature detection)
Thermal fuse FU2 Fixing heater error temperature detection
SpeakerName SP1 speaker*1
T07-602-03

6.2.4 PCBs
[4]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[7]
[9]
[8]
[1]
F07-602-06

[12]
[10]
[11]
F07-602-07
PCBs
Ref. Name Description
1 Image processor PCB image processing control
2 DC controller PCB DC load control
3 Analog processor PCB contact sensor drive, analog image processing
4 Control panel PCB control panel control
5 Sensor PCB ADF (copyboard cover) open/close detection,
contact sensor home position detection
6 Power supply PCB low-voltage power supply control
7 Printer controller PCB computer combination control
8 NCU PCB*1 fax communication control
9 Modular jack PCB*1 telephone line connection
10 Laser scanner motor driver laser scanner motor drive
11 Laser driver BD PCB laser drive, laser beam detection
12 Main motor driver main motor drive
T07-602-04

6.3 Variable Resistors, Light Emitting Diodes (LED), and

Check Pins by PCB
Of the VRs, LEDs, and check pins used in the machine, those needed when servicing in
the field are discussed:
1. Some LEDs emit dim light even when OFF; this is a normal condition,
and must be kept in mind.
2. VRs that may be used in the field:
VRs that must not be used in the field:
Do not touch the VRs and check pins not found in the lists herein; they are
exclusively for the factory, and require special tools and high accuracy.
6.3.1 Image Processor PCB
J305 J315
*1
J317
J309 J310 J311 J312 J314 J316
J318
VR901
J319*2
J308
BAT2 J321*2
J304 J320*2
JP1
J1 BAT1
J307 J303 J302 J301
F07-603-01
JP1: jumper plug for power used by battery to back up memory (control data; user data, service
mode data).
BAT1: battery used to back up memory (SRAM; control data; service mode data, user mode data).
BAT2: battery used to back up memory (SDRAM; fax images)
*1: If equipped with ADF functions


6.3.2 DC Controller PCB
J206
PS101
J203 J202
J201 J204
J205
J210
J207
PS103 VR102
J209 VR101
J208 PS102
F07-603-02
VR101: for factory adjustment

VR102: for factory adjustment

APPENDIX

APPENDIX
1 General Timing Chart

(book mode, A4, 2 copies, Direct, cassette)
Power ON Start key ON

WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
Main motor
Reader motor
Contact sensor Forward Reverse
Contact
sensor LED
Laser scanner
motor
Cassette
pickup solenoid
Paper leading
edge sensor
Delivery sensor
Primary charging
bias (AC)
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Laser diode
Developing
bias (AC)
Developing
bias (DC)
Transfer bias *1 *1
*2 *3 *4 *4 *4 *2
Fixing heater
*1 : Varies depending on the density setting. *5

*2 : Cleaning bias control.
*3 : ATVC control.
*4 : Sheet-to-sheet bias control.
*5 : Temperature control by paper type.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001 A-1
APPENDIX
(ADF, A4 original, A4 paper, 2 copies, Direct, cassette)

Power ON Start key ON
WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY

ADF motor
Original sensor CCW rotation CW rotation
Registration
sensor
Original
delivery sensor
Main motor
Reader motor
Contact sensor
Forward Reverse
Contact
sensor LED
Laser
scanner motor
Cassette
pickup solenoid
Paper leading
edge sensor
Delivery sensor
Primary charging
bias (AC)
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Laser diode
Developing
bias (AC)
Developing
bias (DC)
*1 *1
Transfer bias
Fixing heater *2 *3 *4 *4 *4 *2
*1 : Varies depending on the density setting. *5

*2 : Cleaning bias control.
*3 : ATVC control.
*4 : Sheet-to-sheet bias control.
*5 : Temperature control by paper type.
A-2 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON SmartBase PC1200s/iR1200s REV. 0 DEC. 2001
APPENDIX
2 General Circuit Diagram

Control panel ADF*1 Original Reader unit Main
Laser scanner unit
Original Registration delivery Copyboard Contact sensor
ADF motor
sensor sensor sensor cover open/close home position Fan motor driver Scanner
driver Laser driver/
M3 M1
LCD Membrane PS6 PS7 PS8
Reader motor
sensor
Sensor sensor Contact sensor FM1 motor
Scanner motor
M PS2 PS1 M
M2
PCB M4 BD PCB
3
6 5 4 3 2 1 M J601 J504 1 2 3 1 2 M J801
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4
BOOKCOVERSENS
J3111L J3112 J3112 J3112 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
J3111DH 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 Reader unit
ESSLED
RS_CLK
TR_CLK
+5VDIG
M_CLK
KOUT0
KOUT1
KOUT2
KOUT3
KOUT4
KOUT5
1 2 3 4 5 6 J3122
DGND
DGND
DGND
slide detecting
AGND
AGND
RGV5
LEDG
LEDR
LEDB
R/W
GND
KIN0
KIN1
KIN2
KIN3
KIN4
KIN5
KIN6
KIN7
GND
+8 V
1 2 3 4
GND
OS1
OS2
DB7
DB6
DB5
DB4
DB3
DB2
DB1
DB0

+5V
+5V
switch
RS
V0
E
4 3 2 1 SW1
Speaker*2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J402
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J403
1 2 3 4
J3102L
1 2 3 4
J502
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J503
J3121L
J3121H 2
SP1 1
1 +SP
J3102DH
4 3 2 1
Analog processor PCB J3121D
1 2 3 4
3
Control panel PCB

J404
J501
1 2
2 -SP
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A
A
B
B
J401
BOOKCOBERSENS
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DF-DOCU-DRY
DF-REG-DRY
DF-EXP-DRY
RDHPSENS
DF-DOCU
ESS_LED
ESSKEY
PNLRST
AD_RST
DF-REG
RS_CLK
SH_CLK
AD_CLK
CNTRL0
CNTRL1
TR_CLK
CL_CLK
DF-EXP
SI_OUT
SVCHG
SI_CLK
FANON
PNLCK
PNLRX
M_CLK
FLOCK
PNLTX
DGND
DGND
DGND
BCON
SI_EN
ACON
RGV5
LEDG
RGV5
RGV3
LEDR
+3.3V
LEDB
SI_IN
+24R
+24R
MON
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VDO
VDO
DEC
ACC
VD9
VD8
VD7
VD6
VD5
VD4
VD3
VD2
VD1
VD0
+SP
+5V
+8V
+8V
-SP
BDI
B
B
A
A
A
A
B
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 2 1 PS4
MPSENS
J3081
J310 J317 J312 J316 J314
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
J315 J311 GND
MPSDRV
J308 Manual feed tray paper sensor
SL1
+24R
Image processor PCB
2 1
SL
MP_SL_DRV
J309 Manual feed tray pickup solenoid
SL2
+24R
(for factory)
2 1
SL
CST_SL_DRV
J319 J320 J321 J301 J302 J304 J303 J16 J318 J305
6 5 4 3 2 1 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2
J307 Cassette pickup solenoid
ESS_MODE_CHK
FSR_ERR_DET
CST_SL_DRV
MFPSLP_CC
MPSNS_DRV
PDLSLP_CC
MP_SL_DRV
CNTO_DRV
CNTRL0
RESET_CC
RL_DRV_IP
CNTRL1
RESET0
IPSEL3
IPSEL2
IPSEL1
FVDO+
DCSEL
MPSNS
SVCHG
ANOUT
HOOK1
FANON
FTCLK
DCLIM
FVDO-
FLOCK
SLEEP
CIST2
CIST1
+3.3U
+3.3U
CMLD
RGV3
RGV5
RGV3
XPCT
+24R
+3.3V
+3.3V
SCLK
NOR
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24R
+24R
RRD
+12V
+24V
+12V
OUT
MON
CI0R
FBD
FSC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
HRD
DCD
BDO
SRD
PRD
BIT0
BIT1
BIT2
DEC
ACC
+5V
+5V
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
AST
+5V
BDI
CI1
CI2
C2
C1
RX
SC
NZ
TX
Toner
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 density Cartridge
Modular
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 1
J2 J1 J6 J103 J104 J201 J204 detection J701 J3051
J108 J203 J208 2 1
jack W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
T22
GND Developing
PCB*2
T21
VH +24V CNT1
R bias
1 2
1 2
GND +24V J207
J911 J8
J4 J102
GND COUNTER*3
+5R
T2 *2
NCU PCB GND
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
W Primary
+3.3R
L2 charging
L1
R Power supply J106 J202 J205
bias
T1 XPCI
DC controller PCB Printer controller
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
PCB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SLEEP
J912 J7 J9 FSRDRY
(for Italy only) RLYDRY
POSNS
PCB
POSDRY
Power cord J18 J7 Inlet GND
SUBTH
1 H H Transfer bias
SOLD1 GND
1 2 3
1 2 3
2 N N LGL Paper leading Cassette J209

SOLD2 FSRTH
P2 paper sensor edge sensor paper sensor
PS101 PS102 PS103 (for factory)
J109 J105 J107 J210 Parallel Port USB Port
J206
3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
POSDRY
POSENS
MAINTH
SUBTH
FSR(N)
FSR(L)
GND
GND
GND
Fixing film bias
MT6 MT5
2 1
TP
1 2 3
J1051 TH2 TH1
1 2 3
TP1
1 2 1 2
J1071M 1 2
Sub Main
PS3
Delivery
thermistor thermistor
2
H1 Fixing
1 heater
J1071F 1 2
*1: If equipped ADF functions.
sensor
*2: If equipped fax functions.
*3: Specific country / region models only.
Fixing assembly
APPENDIX

Blank page
APPENDIX
3 List of Special Tools

The following tools are required in addition to the standard set of tools when servicing the
machine:
No. Tool name Tool No. Shape Rank* Remarks

1 Digital multimeter FY9-2002 A For making electrical
checks.
2 NA-3 Test Sheet FY9-9196 A For adjusting/checking

images.
*Rank:
A: Every service person is expected to carry one.

APPENDIX
4 List of Solvents and Oils
No. Name Use Composition Remarks

1 Alcohol Cleaning: e.g., glass, Fluoride-family • Do not bring near fire.
plastic, rubber; ex- hydrocarbon, alco- • Procure locally.
ternal covers. hol, surface activat- • IPA (isopropyl alcohol) may be
ing agent, water. substituted.
2 Solvent Cleaning: metal; oil Fluoride-family • Do not bring near fire.
stain or toner stain. carbon hydrocar- • Procure locally.
bon, chlorine-fam- • MEK may be substituted.
ily, hydrocarbon,
alcohol.
3 Heat-resisting Lubricating; e.g. fix- Mineral oil-family • Tool No. CK-0427 (500 g/can).
grease ing drive assembly. lithium soap, mo-
lybdenum disul-
fide.
4 Lubricant Mineral oil • Tool No. CK-0524 (100 cc).
(puraffin family).
5 Lubricant Lubricating: e.g., Silicone oil. • Tool No. CK-0551 (20 g).
drive assembly, fric-
tion assembly.
6 Lubricant Lubricating: e.g. Silicone oil. • Tool No. FY9-6011 (50 cc)
contact sensor drive
rail.
7 Conducting Lubricating: e.g., Polyehtyl, • Tool No. FY9-6008 (10 g)
grease drum heater contact. polytetrafluoro-
ethylene.

Prepared by
Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center
CANON INC.
REVISION 0 (DEC. 2001) (22114/10653)
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan


Canon Pc1200s - Ir1200s SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon Pc1200s - Ir1200s SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon Pc1200s - Ir1200s SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SmartBase PC1200s/

DEC. 2001 HY8-10AU-000

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in ques-

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

2 Outline of the Manual

Chapter 1 Product Outline: specifications, names of parts, safety and warnings

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

The descriptions in this Service Manual are based on he following rules:

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

The notation “√” indicates that the item in question is available.

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

CHAPTER 2 USING THE MACHINE

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

7 Power Supply System ....................... 4-31 8.2.1.3 Vanadium Lithium

CHAPTER 5 MECHANICAL SYSTEM

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

2.2.6 Removing the NCU PCB 2.7.3 Removing the Delivery

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

1.3.4.3 Original Speed 3.1.8 The output has black lines

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

5.5 Faulty Feeding of Originals 6.2.2 Sensors ............................. 7-100

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

1.5 Copying Speed

Ratio Size Paper size copies/min

Reduce I (50.0%) A4R → postcard postcard - 13

Enlarge I (141.4%) A5R → A4R A4 12 12

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

1.6 ADF (if equipped with ADF functions)

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

1.7 FAX (if equipped fax functions)

Transmission control protocol

Canon express protocol

Transmission output level

Minimum receive input level

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com

1.7.2 Scanner section specifications

Scanning line density

Scanning density adjustment

1.7.3 Printer section specifications

Reduction for reception

Download Free Service Manual at http://netfree1.blogspot.com